JP2022109831A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine holds a lottery regarding whether it executes a winning game including a small win game for opening a variable winning hole and a big win game capable of granting more game balls than the small win game or game ball number data pertaining to game balls on the basis of entry of game balls into a first start winning hole or a second start winning hole, performs determination processing regarding whether a winning game including a big win game is executed, performs determination processing regarding whether a small win game is executed when determining that a winning game including a big win game is not executed and determines that the result is losing when determining that the small win game is not executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, on a game board, a predetermined variable display start condition, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area where the game ball can roll. is established, control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the image display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination. When (a specific display mode) is reached, there is provided a system in which the game is shifted to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.

JP 2019-017680 A

However, conventionally, new models of game machines have been intermittently sought after in the market, and improvements in the amusement of games in the new models have been demanded.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a game area in which game balls roll;
A first start prize winning port and a second start winning port provided on the game area, in which a game ball can win a prize, and when the game ball wins, a game ball or game ball number data related to the game ball is provided to the player. a starting prize opening,
It is provided on the game area and transitions between an open state in which it is easy for a game ball to win and a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win. A variable winning port that provides game ball number data,
A small winning game in which the variable winning opening is opened based on the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening and a larger amount of game balls or games than the small winning game Lottery means for determining whether or not to execute a winning game including a big winning game to which game ball number data related to the ball can be given;
Determining means for determining whether to execute a winning game including the big winning game or the small winning game based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The determination means determines whether or not to execute a winning game including the big winning game, and determines whether or not to execute the small winning game when it is determined not to execute the winning game including the big winning game. is performed, and when it is determined that the small winning game is not executed, it is determined to be a loss.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is viewed from the front and right obliquely upward. It is an example of the exploded perspective view when the 1st pachinko game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance when the first pachinko game machine is seen from the upper right in the rear direction. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. (A) An example of a special symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine, (B) An example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is a modification of the hit type determination table shown in FIG. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at the time of start-up in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a power-off process in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving management processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter update process of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of counter determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of time saving transition processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving setting processing of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the normal game state of the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead per type production pattern determination table in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of losing) in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination process in the first pachinko game machine. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which the big hit-type look-ahead effect form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing the process of changing the look-ahead performance form per time saving system. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process of changing a pending image from a dedicated common win-type look-ahead effect form to a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form. It is the table|surface which shows an example of the output conditions of the signal output outside the machine of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. In the first pachinko game machine, it is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal that is output to the outside according to the game state. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a hit type determination table in the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and (A) opening mode of the specific area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. It is an example of a special design determination table in the expansion example. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the expansion example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) of the specific area FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a case where the open mode is the first open mode, and (B) a case where the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a game machine is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a game machine is seen from the back direction diagonally from the upper right. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a back box is seen from back. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when an engaging part is seen from diagonally upper right rear direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a fixing|fixed part is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of sectional drawing of the state which engaged the fixing|fixed part and the engaging part. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the appearance when a game unit is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a 1st unit is seen from the front diagonally upper right. FIG. 10 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a portion of a flow path provided with an electric accessory when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the part in which the electric accessory was provided is seen from diagonally upper left rear direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a shutter drive part is seen from the front diagonally upper left. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a shutter drive part is seen from the front diagonally upper left. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a ball|ball passage is seen from diagonally upper right rear direction. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a ball|ball passage is seen from back. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a ball|bowl passage base is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a 1st decoration part is seen from the front direction diagonally upper right. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when the drive part of a 1st decoration part is seen from the front. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when the drive part of a 1st decoration part is seen from the front. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a 2nd decoration apparatus is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a 2nd decoration part is seen from the front direction diagonally upper right. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a decoration drive part is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a decoration drive part is seen from diagonally upper right rear direction. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a 2nd decorative part is seen from the front. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a 2nd decorative part is seen from the front. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a drive base part is seen from the front. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when a guide member is seen from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a drive base part is seen from the front. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when a 3rd decoration apparatus is seen from diagonally upper right rear direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows an external appearance when an integrated component is seen from diagonally upper left rear direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance when it sees from the front direction diagonally upper right of a 4th decoration apparatus. It is an example of the figure which shows the external appearance when a detection member is seen from the front.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front side, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear side, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left side. The right side when viewed from the front of the machine is the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is the top side, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is the bottom side, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is the clockwise direction. , and vice versa, define the counterclockwise direction as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In addition, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine that mixes a so-called type 1 type game machine called digipachi and a type 2 type game machine called Hanemono. It is a game machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example in which only one of them is variably displayed will be described. However, it is not intended to exclude the pachinko game machine of one kind and two kinds of machines capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

It should be noted that, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

Further, the term "variable display" as used herein is a concept that includes, for example, both "variable display" in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner and "stop display" in which patterns are displayed in a stopped state. The operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special symbol lottery") and the normal symbol hit determination The result of processing (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is determined. It should be noted that although the design appears to be stopped, the results of the special design hit determination process and the normal design hit determination process are not finalized (for example, temporary stop mode). However, such aspects are included in the variable representation above. Even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the hit determination processing of the special symbols and the hit determination processing of the normal symbols are not determined at this time, so the symbols can be variably displayed again.

Also, in this specification, in describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second special symbol). pattern) will be described as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. First pachinko machine]
First, the first pachinko game machine will be explained.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variation machine") in which, for example, the start condition of the second special symbol is established preferentially over the start condition of the first special symbol when the display is suspended, and the first There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is established in the winning order including the starting opening and the second starting opening.

In the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, etc., is established when all certain requirements are satisfied. In addition, in the priority variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variable. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as that the display is withheld.

In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol are satisfied. In addition, in the sequential variation machine, the conditions for starting the second special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being variably displayed, that there is no jackpot game state, etc., and that the second special symbol is variably displayed. It is established when at least all of the conditions of being suspended and that the earliest suspension is suspension of variable display of the second special symbol are satisfied.

In the following, the priority change machine will be described as an example.

[1-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view when the first pachinko game machine is viewed diagonally from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko game machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). Furthermore, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 . Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly explained, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be explained. Details will be described later. It should be noted that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island facilities of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as a payout unit 8, a substrate unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, a plate unit 5, etc., which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin plate of metal, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it becomes possible to reduce the weight.

(base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a substrate unit 9 attached to the back side thereof and supports them.

A game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. - 特許庁In addition, hinges (no reference numerals) are provided at the upper end, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, and the upper end A glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges at the middle portion and the middle portion, and a plate unit 5 is journaled by the hinges at the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the glass door 4 and the tray unit 5 forward together or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

In addition, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached to the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. there is The speaker 32 outputs, for example, sound effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, sound effects such as voice notification, error notification, and the like.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the opposite side of the base door 3 to the hinge (that is, the right end). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3 .

(glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member with an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see later-described FIG. 4) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front while the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be formed by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) glasses with a gap between them, or by unitizing a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. may Furthermore, in the case of a unitized one, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to be made of glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

Further, below the glass door 4, there is provided an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, the player in order to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated on the hall menu screen by the manager of the game arcade or the like.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 is provided above the glass door 4 . Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for lighting effects are arranged around the opening 41 of the glass door 4 , and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46 . Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for the sake of convenience, the LED group 46 will be described. The LED group 46 is, for example, light emitting means for performing lighting effects such as notification with light and various variations of light emitting effects. may be

(dish unit)
The plate unit 5 is formed by unitizing an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. - 特許庁The tray unit 5 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4 . As described above, the tray unit 5 is configured to be opened and closed by rotating it with respect to the base door 3 so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integral plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are shot from the shooting device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, a performance button 54, and the like. A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 53 to an upper tray 51.例文帳に追加The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of the hit determination process for special symbols. Also, the functions of the operation unit 66 may be shared.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 . The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout port 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls overflowing from the upper tray 51 are paid out to the lower tray 52 through the payout port 55. - 特許庁

The bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is formed with an opening (without reference numerals) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52 . In addition, when a so-called each-machine counting system is provided for each machine, not only does the ball box not be required, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are reused. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The shooting device 6 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and to the lower right side of the pan unit 5 . The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 62 .

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the firing device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrated in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3 .

The shooting handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61 . The driving device described above is arranged on the back side of the panel body 61 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the shooting handle 62, the game ball is shot by the operation of the driving device. When operating the shooting handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (the amount of operation), the stronger the shooting strength of the game ball.

A game ball shot from a shooting device 6 arranged on the lower right side of the plate unit 5 passes through a shooting rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. The area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) is embossed. In addition, the arrangement position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5 , and may be the lower left side of the dish unit 5 . In this case, the above launch rail is not required, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, making it possible to enhance versatility.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various game-related effect images, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100 . The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. may be In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or a special pattern hit determination process result is displayed. A performance image, a performance image during the jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending state of variable display of special symbols, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10. However, if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. You may enable it to be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. An image may be displayed.

(Dispensing unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and comprises a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). The payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to the upper tray 51, for example, when the payout condition is satisfied. A power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(substrate unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the rear side of the base door 3 . Various control boards and the like are provided in the board unit 9 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control board 91 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. A board 92, a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls is mounted on a payout/launch control board 93, and a power supply circuit 450 (shown in the diagram below) for supplying power. 6) is mounted on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/fire control board 93 and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case. ing.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (one board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs). However, not limited to this, for example, all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a character control circuit 307 (all of which will be described later in FIG. 6) can be provided on a separate substrate. By doing so, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 10, a game area 105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 105. A center accessory 115, a first starting port 120, a general prize winning port 122, a passage gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting port 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145 , an LED unit 160 , an out port 178 , and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10 . Incidentally, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7 . A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be seen from the front. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 105 is partitioned (demarcated) by the guide rails 110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116. - 特許庁

In this first pachinko game machine, of the game area 105 , the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is called the left area 106 , and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is called the right area 107 . The definitions of the left side area and the right side area are the same for the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine which will be described later.

A game ball shot toward the game area 105 by the shooting device 6 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 107 .

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the shooting handle 62, a method of shooting a game ball so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left hitting", and a hitting method that causes the game ball to flow down the right side region 107 is referred to as "left hitting". A method of shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting". In this way, the player can hit the game ball either toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 .

In addition, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp entrance 117 at its left outer peripheral edge, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 117 is configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115 . The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119 at the first start. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol Various random numbers such as the random number for judging the jackpot, the random number for the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the starting condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as "fluctuation starting condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first 1 special symbol symbol random value, reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values of the first special symbol effect selection random value, etc.) is referred to as start information of the first special symbol. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(general prize entrance)
A plurality of general winning holes 122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right area 107, and includes a passing gate 126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected by the passage gate switch 127, various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of the normal symbols) are extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, a maximum of 4) is stored. The stored various data are usually provided for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107 .

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbols) etc.) is usually referred to as starting information of the design. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is established is called suspension.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 integrates a big prize slot 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the winning (passage) of a game ball into the big prize slot 131, and a special electric role product 133. It is a unit body that has become. The special electric accessory unit 130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 125 in the right area 107 .

The big winning opening 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning hole 131, a big winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize may be arranged, or a game may be played on the upper part of the center accessory 115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

Also, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) a prize when controlled in a jackpot game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the prize-winning entrance. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 131, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134 . The special electric accessory 133, that is, the special electric shutter 134, is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131 or is easily opened, and in which a game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening 131. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game state in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. is.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is difficult or impossible for a left-handed game ball to win due to, for example, a game nail. is configured to be guided to the vicinity of However, it is not essential to configure the second starting port 140 in this manner, and it may be provided in the right region 107, for example. Also, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that left-handed game balls can win.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for second special symbols, random numbers for reach judgment for second special symbols, and random numbers for selecting effects of second special symbols, etc.) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, four at maximum) of the various data thus obtained are stored. The stored various data are subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol when the second special symbol start condition (also referred to as "second special symbol variation start condition" in this specification) is satisfied. When a game ball enters the second starting port 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is arranged in the left area 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first start port 120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) the game balls. It is a unit body that integrates a prize winning hole, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 146.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141 .

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chew and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the general electric movable member 147. . The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the ordinary electric movable member 147 is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second start port 140, and in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter the second start port 140. It is configured to allow state transitions to and from possible or difficult closed states. In addition, the general electric movable member 147 includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(out port)
The out port 178 is launched toward the game area 105, but does not win any of the various winning ports (eg, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.). It is for ejecting missing game balls out of the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general winning ports 122, so that the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged out of the machine. can be

(back unit)
A back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 10 and is provided behind the transparent game panel 100 . This back unit includes a performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub-control circuit 300 . The performance accessory group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 58 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 10 and outside the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display portion 161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 162, a first special symbol display portion 163, a second special symbol display portion 164, and a first special symbol reservation display. A part 165, a second special symbol reservation display part 166, a probability variation notification display part 167, and a time reduction notification display part 168 are provided.

(Normal pattern display part)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of normal symbols") is established, the variable display of normal symbols is started, in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b alternately turn on and off. be. When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbols is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is lit and the normal symbol display LED 161b is extinguished. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 Winning (passing) of game balls to is facilitated.

(Reserved display for normal symbols)
The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable displays of normal symbols that are being held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending normal symbols") when the starting information of the normal symbols, that is, the variable display is being held. It is provided with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of normal symbols is suspended" means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is detected, and various data (for example, random numbers for determining hits of normal symbols, etc.) applied to the normal symbols are It refers to the state from extraction to establishment of the starting condition of the normal symbol. It should be noted that the starting condition of the normal symbol is established when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The normal symbol pending display unit 162 displays the number of variable display pending normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol pending display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols is normally one, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design lights up and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design goes out. Also, when the number of reserved symbols is normally two, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols light up. Further, when the number of reserved symbols is normally 3, the reserved display LED 162a for the normal design flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for the normal design lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols is normally four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols blink. However, the display mode of the normal design reservation display LEDs 162a and 162b indicating the number of normal design reservations is not limited to this.

(Special pattern display part)
The special symbol display section displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and includes a first special symbol display section 163 and a second special symbol display section 164 . The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display section 164 also has a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 Or the variable display of the 1st special design which repeats lighting and extinguishing alternately or mutually is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display portion 163 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 Or the variable display of the 2nd special design which repeats lighting and extinguishing partly alternately or mutually is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display portion 164 is stop-displayed in a specific stop-display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Reserved display for special symbols)
The special symbol pending display unit displays the number of variable display of special symbols that are suspended (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, that is, the variable display is suspended. It comprises a first special symbol reservation display portion 165 and a second special symbol reservation display portion 166 .

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. Prepare. "Variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, the first It refers to the state until the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The first special symbol pending display unit 165 displays the number of pending variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol pending display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the reserved number of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a lights up and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. Further, when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, both of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reserved first special symbols is not limited to this.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of second special symbols pending when variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. Prepare. "Variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, the second It refers to the state until the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

The second special symbol pending display unit 166 displays the number of pending variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a lights up and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b goes out. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, both of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol pending display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of pending second special symbols is not limited to this.

(Probability notification display unit)
The variable probability notification display unit 167 can be lit during execution of the variable probability control described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variation notification display unit 167 may be turned on during execution of the probability variation control, but for example, by not lighting so as not to be able to grasp that the probability variation control is being performed from the appearance, the probability variation control is being executed may be concealed.

However, when the power is cut off during execution of the variable probability control, the data indicating that the variable probability control is being executed does not disappear due to the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power is turned off during execution of variable probability control and then turned on, the variable probability notification display unit 167 lights up in such a manner that the variable probability control is being performed.

In addition, even if whether or not the probability variation control is being executed is kept secret before the power is turned off, the probability variation notification display unit 167 is lit when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is configured to be able to grasp that the variable probability control is being executed.

(Display unit for time saving notification)
The time saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time reduction notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time reduction notification display unit 168a and a second time reduction notification display unit 168b. Not limited.

Further, although the details will be described later, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state and a C time saving game state. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp which time-saving gaming state is by a combination of lighting or extinguishing by the first time-saving information display unit 168a and the second time-saving information display unit 168b.

The display unit 168 for time saving information may light up the first display unit 168a for time saving information and/or the second display unit 168b for time saving information according to the time saving control being executed, but for example, the time saving control Whether it is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed can not be grasped by the appearance (for example, all lights off, all lights, modes unrelated to time saving control being executed) By turning on or off, The fact that the time saving control is being executed and the type of the time saving control being executed may be kept secret so as not to be grasped from the appearance. In particular, it may be possible to grasp from the appearance whether or not time-saving control is being executed, but it may be difficult to grasp from the appearance which time-saving control is being executed. Interest can be heightened by making secret the kind of time saving control of inside.

However, when the power is cut off during the execution of time-saving control, not only the data indicating that the time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed by the function of the backup capacitor 207, which will be described later. does not disappear either. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the execution of the time saving control and then the power is turned on, the time saving notification display unit 168 lights up or goes out.

Before the power is turned off, even if the fact that time saving control is being executed or the type of time saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In this case, the display unit 168 for time saving notification is lit and / and extinguished in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be grasped from the appearance.

[1-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450 .

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset It has a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected with a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, and the like. The main CPU 201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko game machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202 .

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for progressing the game. The main RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 to store various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes an I/O port 205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200 . For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the normal symbol display portion 161, the normal symbol reservation display portion 162, the first special symbol display portion 163, the second special symbol display portion 164, and the first special symbol reservation display portion 165. , Second special symbol holding display unit 166, probability variation notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, general electric solenoid 148, special electric solenoid 135, etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 200 is also connected to a performance display monitor 170, an error notification monitor 172, and the like. Main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 205 .

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values, which will be described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are the first starter switch 121, the second starter switch 141, the passage gate switch 127, the count switch 132, the general winning switch 123, and the like. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205 .

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 186 that controls the pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 operated when changing or confirming the setting value in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 are transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared in response to the operation of . In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also only those corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game hall to expose the back surface, the manager of the game hall can press the setting key 174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured to allow contact with the clear switch 176 .

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 .

[1-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a character control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 200 . Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302 . In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7 . The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, image data is provided as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7 . In this manner, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 32 . The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 32 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32 .

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 58). The role item control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a driving signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 .

[1-2-3. Dispensing/launching control circuit]
The payout/shooting control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, and a game ball to shoot. A launching device 6 capable of controlling ball rental, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180 . The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving a ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180 . The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 180 . The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) when the firing handle 62 is turned clockwise. It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

[1-2-4. power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, and the like.

The power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450 . The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of the game flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. FIG. 7 is an example of a game flow. FIG. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be understood visually.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is shot by a user's operation of a player or the like, and when the game ball enters various prize winning openings (for example, the first start opening 120, etc.), the game ball is released. A payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which special symbol hit determination processing is executed based on the winning of game balls into the starting ports 120 and 140, and whether or not to shift to a big win game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game is, for example, executing the normal symbol hit determination process based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, operating the normal electric accessory 146, and operating the winning opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game for determining whether or not to open the starting port 140). In this specification, "special symbol game" may be referred to as "game", but "game" is a term used in a broad concept, for example, operation units such as normal symbol games and production buttons 54 ( For example, see FIG. 1) is included in "games".

Also, in this specification, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, until this variable display is finished and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is confirmed (derived) (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed until the time elapses) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived, when the game is controlled to the big win game state, one special symbol game is performed until the end of the big win game state. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in a pachinko game machine in which the small hit is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination is performed. After the result of the processing is derived, if the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, one special symbol game is performed until the small winning game state ends.

In the special symbol game, when the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164, the game is controlled to the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, the operation of the special electric accessory 133 executes a round game in which the jackpot 131 is open for a predetermined time (for example, maximum 30000 msec), and the possibility of winning the jackpot 131 is relatively high. be done.

In addition, when the stop display mode indicating the winning of the normal symbols in the normal symbol game is drawn to the normal symbol display unit 161, the operation of the normal electric accessory 146 causes the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 140 in this embodiment) to open. It becomes an open state, and the winning possibility to the 2nd starting port 140, for example is relatively increased.

In addition, the game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol start winning process which is performed when there is a winning (passing) through the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, and a special symbol game. Includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for design, a reach judgment Various random numbers such as random numbers for use and random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (acquired) respectively. Each random value extracted is retained as starting information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the special symbol is satisfied. When the starting condition of the special pattern is established, the random number value for judging the big win extracted from the counter for judging the big win of the special pattern is referred to, and the special pattern hit judging process for judging whether or not it is a ``big hit'' is performed. After that, stop symbol determination processing for determining a stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number extracted from the special symbol symbol determination counter and the result of the special symbol win determination process.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability flag is ON, the variable probability control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, if the probability variation flag is off, it is determined that it is a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as a "jackpot probability".

The variable probability flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not variable probability control is to be executed. When the probability variation flag is on, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, in the present embodiment high probability short-time gaming state) in which probability variation control is executed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is off, the game progresses in the gaming state (for example, the normal game state or the low probability time-saving gaming state) in which the probability variation control is not executed.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-described special symbol hit determination process, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern is obtained. (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, for example, display effects such as decorative patterns and character effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7, sound effects such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 32, etc. is performed. Note that the effect control processing is performed by the sub CPU 301 .

Then, the special symbol variable display control process and the performance control process are finished, and if the game is a big win, a big win game control process is carried out. The big-hit game control process is a process executed in the big-hit game state. When the big win game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-big win game state is performed. In this case, the game state shifts according to the type of the big win. For example, when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set to ON, the game moves to a high probability time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, if it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win, if a small win is won. Small hit game control processing is performed. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is established, various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

In addition, when there is a winning of game balls to the starting ports 120 and 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting winning process is executed. In addition, starting information of special symbols extracted when a game ball enters the starting ports 120, 140 (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for special symbols, random numbers for judging reach, and random numbers for selecting effects) Various data such as various random numbers such as numerical values) are withheld until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the starting information of special symbols can be reserved up to a total of 4 pieces of starting information of the first special symbols and 4 pieces of starting information of the second special symbols. , The number of starting information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the starting information of the first special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the second special symbol, or the starting information of the second special symbol may be retained more than the starting information of the first special symbol. can be

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 7, it is extracted at the time of winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 after the special symbol starts winning and before the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Pre-reading judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 to be described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (whether or not a "big hit" is won) and the variation pattern prior to the special symbol hitting judging process based on the starting information, and this pre-reading judgment is performed. A look-ahead effect function that performs a predetermined effect based on the result may be provided. The above-mentioned look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the starting information extracted by the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 120, 140 is withheld.

[1-3-2. Normal pattern game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol starting passage process which is performed when a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and when a normal symbol starting condition is established. Normal design control processing, etc. are included.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 126, normal symbol start passage processing is executed. In the normal symbol starting passage processing, normal symbol starting information (for example, normal symbol winning determination random number value, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the normal symbol winning determination counter, and the extracted starting information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the condition for starting the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted from the normal symbol hit determination counter, and determines whether or not to set the "normal symbol hit". A pattern hit determination process is executed, and then a variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the normal design hit determination process is referred to, and the normal design variation pattern is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the results of the win determination process for the normal symbols and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols, and performs variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols and a predetermined effect. Perform production control processing. Note that the effect control process may not be executed.

When the normal symbol variable display control process and effect control process are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal winning symbol indicating "normal symbol winning" has been drawn to the normal symbol display section 161 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). determine whether When determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is derived, the main CPU 201 executes normal symbol winning game control processing. In this normal per symbol game control process, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) operates, and the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). It becomes an open state in which (passing) is possible or easy. On the other hand, when determining that the stop display mode indicating the normal winning is not derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the game state (for example, normal game state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability of deriving the stop display mode indicating the normal winning may be set to 0. Time-saving control is, compared to when time-saving control is not executed, a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of special symbols, and a winning opening (in this embodiment, for example, the third 2 starting port 140 (see FIG. 4)), the control in which at least one of the electric sapo control that increases the frequency of opening the start port 140 (see FIG. 4) is performed. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control.

The electric sapo control improves the time saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal pattern", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) of the normal electric accessory 146. It is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), and the winning probability of "per normal symbol" , the variable display time of normal symbols, or/and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (number of times of opening, opening time, wait time, etc.). Improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to win a game ball into a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment). That is, when the electric sapo control is executed, compared with the case where the electric sapo control is not executed, the winning probability of "per normal symbol" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, or / and normal electric accessories Winning facilitation (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) is performed by 146.

Then, each time the starting condition of the normal symbol is established, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when there is passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 during the normal design control processing, the normal design start passage processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (for example, normal symbol hit determination random number) is withheld until the normal symbol start condition is established.

In addition, the start of the variable display of normal symbols is performed in the order of being held, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is satisfied, the variable display of the start information that is held first among the start information of the held normal symbols is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random numbers (for example, the random number for judging the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number of the first special symbol, the random number for the reach judgment of the first special symbol, the random number for judging the big hit of the second special symbol, The pattern random number value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random number value of the second special symbol, and the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) are extracted within a predetermined range ( width) may be used, or a hard random number method may be used in which a random number is extracted from a counter in a random number generator whose random number is updated at predetermined intervals.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when the jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol win determination processing, the non-jackpot game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. In addition, the explanation about the small winning game state shall be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state is divided into a low-probability state in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol win determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning the big win in the special symbol win determination process is relatively high. can be broadly classified.

The high certainty gaming state includes a high certainty short working hours gaming state (high certainty high base) in which time saving control is executed. It should be noted that, although not included in the high certainty gaming state in the first pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. state may be included.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability low base) in which time saving control is not executed and a time saving game state (low probability high base) in which time saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time saving game state includes an A time saving game state, a B time saving game state, and a C time saving game state.

The A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a special symbol game of a specified number of times is executed or transitioned to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is changed. finish. When the A time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the state shifts to the normal game state.

In the B time-saving gaming state, for example, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high certainty gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which the probability variation flag is off) has started, and the later-described RAM has been cleared. When the number of variable display times of special symbols (e.g., ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times) starting from such as, it is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted, and whether the special symbol game is executed for the specified number of times , When it shifts to the jackpot game state, the B time-saving game state ends. When the B time-saving game state is completed by executing a specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

The C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of the time-saving winning is derived. When the prescribed number of special symbol games determined by winning the time-saving win are executed or the game is shifted to a big win game state, the C time-saving game state is terminated. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above-mentioned specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, for example, when a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the C time-saving game state continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether or not a plurality of time-saving gaming states are executed repeatedly, the conditions for shifting to the time-saving gaming state are established in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for shifting to multiple time-saving gaming states are established at the same time To do, the time saving game state is referred to as “overlapping”. Then, when a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the control of the main CPU 201 internally activates any of the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally activates the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Running in parallel is called "overlapping". However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving gaming states, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states. That is, even when a plurality of time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner, the player perceives that the game is controlled to one of the plurality of time-saving game states.

Next, the game state transition will be described.

Normal game state, reduced working hours game state (A reduced working hours game state, B reduced working hours game state, C reduced working hours game state), and high certainty game state (for example, high certainty reduced working hours game state) Even if it is controlled, special symbols If the result of the hit determination process is a big hit, the state shifts to a big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it can be shifted to any of a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a high-certainty game state (for example, a high-certainty time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state that can be shifted when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the high certainty game state, it does not shift from the high certainty game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, from the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, it does not shift to the high-accuracy gaming state unless it passes through the big-hit gaming state.

When it is controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to shift to the B time reduction game state or C time reduction game state, but it is not possible to shift to the A time reduction game state unless the jackpot game state is passed. However, when the special symbol game is executed a specified number of times in the A time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state, so it is possible to shift from the A time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, even if it is controlled to either the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, when the special symbol game of the specified number of times is executed, it will shift to the normal game state. It is also possible to shift from the game state to the normal game state.

Next, the transition between the time-saving game states will be described.

When it is controlled to the A time saving game state, the number of time saving times that can be executed in the A time saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling value which is the condition for transition to the B time saving game state, so from the A time saving game state to B It does not shift to the time saving game state. In addition, since the A time saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the B time saving game state to the A time saving game state. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the A time saving game state is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is satisfied, so the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state can overlap. . However, since the A time-saving game state is controlled via the jackpot game state as described above, there is no transition from the C time-saving game state to the A time-saving game state.

When it is controlled to the B time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is established, and the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state are established. can be duplicated. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state can overlap.

When it is controlled to the C time saving game state, if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the condition for shifting to the C time saving game state is established, and the C time saving game state and the C time saving game state are established. can be duplicated.

In addition, the detail about duplication of a time-saving game state is mentioned later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, basic specifications of the first pachinko game machine will be described.

In the first pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time saving control is executed, the high probability time saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time saving control are executed, and the time saving control although the variable probability control is not executed A low-probability, time-saving game state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 201 can progress the game in any one of these game states. However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state, the right-handed hit is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7 . Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (e.g., shooting mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each set value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, using the above-described setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6 for both), a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6, for example, can be set. Any one of these can be set. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the big hit probability differs according to the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol win determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is not executed is off game state (for example, normal game state and low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) jackpot probability in the first special symbol hit determination process and the second special For example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1/309. 1/304, setting 5 is about 1/299, setting 6 is about 1/294. In addition, the probability variation flag in which the probability variation control is executed is on (in this embodiment, for example, a high probability short-time gaming state). Setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72.

It should be noted that the time saving hit probability is a probability common to all set values, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is 1/160, and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, the time saving probability is 1/240. there is The time saving hit probability may be different between when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but may be the same.

However, even if the time saving hit probability is a common probability with all set values, the time saving continuation rate (for example, the time saving number of times to be set) may be varied according to the set values. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", for example, in the case of setting 1, 50 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in the case of setting 6, 100 times are set as the number of time saving can be

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the small win is not included in the lottery target, but the small win may be included in the lottery target. When small hits are included in the lottery targets, the small hit probability may be a common probability for all set values. In addition, when the small hit is included in the lottery target, the small hit is won only when the hit determination processing of one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (for example, the second special pattern) is performed. You can make it soothing. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to the aspect of not performing the determination itself of whether or not the small hit was won, whether or not the small hit probability was set to 0 may be determined.

The above-mentioned short-time hit probability and the small hit probability when including the small hit in the lottery target are common probabilities for all set values as described above, but not limited to this, as different probabilities depending on the set value good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but it is not limited to this. A plurality of setting values may have the same jackpot probability, such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot probability common to setting 5 and setting 6.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, the big win probability differs according to the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the big win probability. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a specific winning hole may be varied according to the set value. It should be noted that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 10 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 9 as an example.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time saving hit" based on the big hit determination random number extracted when the game ball wins in the start ports 120 and 140. , a table to be referred to when determining a "big hit" or "losing" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery target is "time saving hit", "big hit" and "losing", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 120 or / and When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "big hit", or "lose" based on the extracted big hit determination random number value in the first special symbol win determination process. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the variable probability flag is off, and when the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the variable probability flag is on.

In addition, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines, in the same way as in the first special symbol win determination process, based on the extracted big win determination random number value, a "time-saving win", a "big win", or a "loss". ” is decided. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 ”, and the hit-loss determination value data is determined as “time saving hit determination value data”. Further, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Also, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges that it is "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Also, when the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines "time saving hit". It judges and decides judgment value data as "time reduction per judgment value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". Further, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for big hit determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines "losing" and determines. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging the big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the case of the hit judging process of the first special symbol), It is assigned to other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data) excluding big hit judgment value data and loss judgment value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag is turned from off to on (or from on to off), the width of the loss judgment value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or decreases) the width of the big hit judgment value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared with the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, when "time saving hit" is won in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and when the "time saving win" is won just before the time saving game state ends, the time saving game state is activated. It will be extended substantially, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, even if the variable probability flag is ON or OFF, it is possible to win the "time saving hit". However, when the probability variation flag is off (normal game state, time reduction game state), the main CPU 201 controls to the time reduction game state if the result of the hit determination process is "time reduction hit", but the probability variation flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[1-4-3. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining a stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting ports 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when losing determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 outputs a selected symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the design designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is referred to when making a decision according to the design command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. 1-byte control signal. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) forming the first special symbol display portion 163 on a one-to-one basis. For example, the first special symbol area 0 corresponds to 163a, the first special symbol area 1 corresponds to 163b, the first special symbol area 2 corresponds to 163c, and the first special symbol area 3 corresponds to 163d. , the first special symbol area 4 corresponds to 163e, the first special symbol area 5 corresponds to 163f, the first special symbol area 6 corresponds to 163g, and the first special symbol area 7 corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each area 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display portion 164 one-to-one. For example, the second special symbol area 0 corresponds to 164a, the second special symbol area 1 corresponds to 164b, the second special symbol area 2 corresponds to 164c, and the second special symbol area 3 corresponds to 164d. , the second special symbol area 4 corresponds to 164e, the second special symbol area 5 corresponds to 164f, the second special symbol area 6 corresponds to 164g, and the second special symbol area 7 corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the LED display mode (time saving win display mode) derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 is determined as follows. be done. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol The LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, and the first special symbol area. The LED 163b corresponding to 1 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163 and the first special symbol area. 2 and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, so that the first special symbol display part 163 is stopped and displayed. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 164a corresponding to the area 0 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol LED 164b corresponding to area 1 and LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 displays the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and the second special symbol area. 2 and the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the display mode of the LEDs (big hit display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201, of the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display section 163, the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 and the first special symbol The LED 163e corresponding to the area 4 and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display part 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol area. 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display unit 163, and the first special symbol area. LED 163e corresponding to 4, LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, the first special symbol display It decides to stop displaying the part 163 . When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol area. 4 and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and the second special symbol area. 5 is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the second special symbol display part 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", the display mode of the LEDs (losing display mode) led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the first special symbol area 7 among the eight LEDs forming the first special symbol display portion 163, LED is turned off, and the first special symbol display portion 163 is determined to be stopped and displayed. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol among the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display portion 164, and lights the other LEDs. is turned off, and the second special symbol display portion 164 is determined to be stopped and displayed.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol stop mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED to constitute, and controls the stop mode of the special symbols derived to the first special symbol display portion 163 or the second special symbol display portion 164 .

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display portion 163 and the display mode of the LED led to the second special symbol display portion 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable to transmit the control signals separately for the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 .

FIG. 12B is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The decorative pattern stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the decorative pattern stop mode (symbol combination) derived when the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 is stopped, according to the pattern designation command. be done. It should be noted that the "remarks" column shown in FIG.

Since the first pachinko gaming machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 variably displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display device 7 is controlled so that the display effect for the special symbol being displayed is performed. In this case, it is preferable that the sub CPU 301 performs the display effect in such a manner that it is possible to grasp whether the special symbol variably displayed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 are composed of 9 patterns, for example, 1 to 9, for the left pattern, and 10 patterns, for example, 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern, for the middle pattern. , and the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving design is a design that is stopped and displayed when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, such as when the result of the special design lottery is a time-saving winning, for example. By stop-displaying the medium pattern as the time-saving pattern, the player can grasp that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, the symbols constituting the medium symbols may include a small win symbol. (symbols stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit) may be included. In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can know that a small win has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols. As such, for example, the left and right symbols are stopped at even-numbered symbols, and the middle symbols are stopped at time-saving symbols.

If the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (if the result of the special symbol lottery is "time saving hit"), the sub CPU 301, as a mode of stopping the decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are odd numbers. The pattern is stopped, and the medium pattern is stopped by the time-saving pattern. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case of "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z7"), the number of set time reductions is large, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 determines, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol as the mode of stopping the decorative symbols. is stopped at a matching pattern of odd patterns (zorome).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 determines, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol as the mode of stopping the decorative symbols. is stopped at a matching pattern of even patterns (zorome). It should be noted that the symbol designation command "zA4" is, as can be seen from FIG. There is a case where the probability variation flag is not set to ON (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the selected symbol command is either "z4" or "z5", the sub CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the aligned symbols of the even-numbered symbols (zorome), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a probability variable flag is set to ON).

Also, as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the design designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the design designation command is "zA3" or "zA8 ”, the expected value that the probability variation flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot gaming state is small. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "Loss"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols at random. A loose stitch corresponds to, for example, a stop mode in which at least one of the left, right, and middle symbols is different from the other symbols.

In FIG. 12(B), the decorative pattern stop mode according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the design designation command is "zA1", the left design "2", the middle design "time saving", the right design "4") Although illustrated, the stop mode shown in the column of the decorative pattern stop mode in FIG. 12B is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state in accordance with the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state, so the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the number of times of time saving to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", since it is not controlled to the big win game state, the mode of the big win game state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the time saving number of times to be set is the same and However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In the case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving hit" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, the high certainty game state is continued without controlling to the C time saving game state. can be

In addition, the main CPU 201 draws a lottery for "shorter working hours" when the variable probability flag is on, and even if the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly displayed on the special symbol display unit. 163 and 164.

Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit judgment value data is not assigned to the big hit judgment random value, that is, the "time saving hit" is not included in the lottery result (special symbol hit judgment processing result) hit A determination process may be performed. In this case, when the probability variation flag is off, the time saving hit determination value data is assigned to the big hit determination random number value, and when the probability variation flag is on, the time saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the width of the random number assigned to the time saving per judgment value data when the probability variation flag is off is instead of the time saving per judgment value data, the loss judgment value data, the big hit judgment value data, or the loss judgment value It is assigned to both the data and the big hit judgment value data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time-saving game state such that the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit" You may make it transfer to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and to set both the variable probability number and the time saving number to 10000 times. In these cases, the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, then controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, can control to the high-accuracy short-time game state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined to set both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to ON, and to set both the variable probability number and the time saving number to 10000 times. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the main CPU 201 can control to the high-accuracy time-saving game state. Become.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 200 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 163, it controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the aspect of the big win gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the game state after that, it is determined to set only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag to ON. Moreover, it determines to set the number of times of time saving to set to 300 times, for example. In this case, after the main CPU 201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 164, the main CPU 201 controls to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, it becomes controllable to the time saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is also the A time saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time saving performance in the high probability time saving game state is the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in the A time saving game state.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), the main CPU 201 changes the mode of the big win game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z11"), as described above, the mode of the jackpot game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 13.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Win/lose determination value data is determined based on the random number value (win/lose determination is performed), and win/lose (“time-saving hit”, “big hit” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. Based on the value data, the selected symbol command is determined, and the type of display mode derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164 (the type of time-saving hit or the type of big hit) is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in the A time reduction game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5"), or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z1" and "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol commands are "z2" and "z8"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit".

In addition, instead of the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state being higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the C time saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. may be set higher than the expected value of the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modification of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. In this FIG. 14, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" and "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z7") or 200 times ( If the selected pattern command is "z2", "z8"). Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

In this specification, similarly to the variable probability flag, when the value of the time saving flag is "0", the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is "1", the time saving flag is on.

A time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in main RAM203 like a probability variation flag, and is a flag for managing whether time saving control is performed.

Moreover, the number of times of shortening of working hours is the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed by continuing the shortening of working hours control. That is, for example, when the number of times of time saving is determined to be "50", if variable display of special symbols is performed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time saving game state, this time saving game state is terminated and non-time saving game is played. It shifts to a state (for example, normal game state).

In addition, "10000" of the probability variable number of times and the time saving number shown in FIG. .

[1-4-6. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. The column of "remarks" in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience so that it is easy to understand. Time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, big hit system reach A, B, C is a reach effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Further, the common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is possible for both time-saving hits and big hits. In addition, FIG. 15 is a special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is off, and illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table when the probability variation flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140. - 特許庁Determining fluctuation patterns. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 15 is a table referred to when performing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 of FIG. 28 described later.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win or lose), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value, or / And, although it is determined based on the random number value for effect selection or the like, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values or the like instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when a look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the variable probability flag is on.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead effect) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206 . The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

Although not shown in FIG. 15, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to whether the time saving flag is on regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, as the time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are prepared. These time-saving game states will be described below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". is. That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, it does not necessarily shift to the A time-saving gaming state, but when the conditions that prevent the transition to the A time-saving gaming state are established (for example, when the backup is cleared etc.) does not shift to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "A specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see column "Number of times of shortening of hours" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied.

The B time-saving gaming state is, for example, the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the starting point is when the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-certainty gaming state (for example, the normal game state and the low-certainty time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) is started. , the ceiling counter is updated (1 is added), and the time saving game state is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "final ceiling fluctuation") is started, or when the ceiling final fluctuation is finished. Alternatively, it may be the time when the variable display of the special symbol following the final ceiling change is started. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the ceiling final variation is started and when the variable display of the next special symbol is started. In addition, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process in the final ceiling change is "losing", the display mode of losing is derived to the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the transition to the B time saving game state is performed. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays to the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). , a special effect by a character, or a effect of both of these) may be controlled to be displayed on the display device 7. FIG. It should be noted that even if the condition to transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established, it does not necessarily shift to the B time-saving gaming state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is established (for example, a special When the result of the pattern hit determination process is a big hit, etc.), the game state is not shifted to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variation flag is on, and when the probability variation flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, unless the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is "big hit", the game is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In a pachinko game machine including a small win in the result of special symbol win determination processing, when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is "small win" when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the display mode of the small win. is led to the special symbol display portions 163 and 164, the B time-saving game state may be started, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the end of the small winning game state. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "small hit", the special symbol display portions 163 and 164 only display the display mode of the small win. , the above-described display effect for showing the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value is not displayed. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may differ according to the setting value. In addition, when the result of the special pattern win determination processing when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is "big win", the game is controlled to the big win game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the ceiling counter is controlled to the jackpot game state, when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process), the backup clear switch 176 When another switch (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, in a game machine that can change the normal per symbol probability, when the high probability of the normal per symbol probability ends, etc. is reset when the condition is met. Then, when the update of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time the variable display of the special pattern is executed. For example, if the variable probability flag is on, updating the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the variable display of the next special symbol. Note that the ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined unique to the pachinko game machine instead of being set each time.

If the ceiling counter is cleared by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the variable probability flag is not turned on after the jackpot game state is ended, the main CPU 201 will display the variable display of the first special symbol at the start or end. Update (+1) the ceiling counter. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the variable probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but if it is a specification that performs a ST machine or a variable drop lottery, for example, the probability variable flag The ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the is turned off. In addition, in the case of specifications that perform a variable drop lottery, the variable flag will be changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special design, so if you update the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special design, the special design If the variable probability flag is off at the end of the variable display, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with specifications in which a variable probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, when the sub CPU 301 receives a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, an effect that suggests that the variable probability drop lottery has been won, and a high probability game It is preferable not to perform an effect suggesting transition from the state to the low probability gaming state. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing of starting the count by the ceiling counter, that is, the timing of transition to the B time saving game state based on the display effect etc. displayed on the display device 7, and it is interesting. It is possible to provide a game with When it is difficult to grasp the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state, for example, a countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state or a fake countdown effect is displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub CPU 301. , it becomes possible to further enhance interest.

In addition, when the clearing process (backup clearing process) of the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 starts variable display of the special symbol for the first time after the clearing process of the work area in the RAM 203. Update (+1) the ceiling counter at time or end.

Furthermore, when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 causes the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated. update (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and a predetermined prescribed number of times (hereinafter It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied, out of the case where the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state, "When the variable display of the special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times is executed", is the B time-saving specified number of times of the special design variable display (hereinafter "B time-saving final variation ”) may be started, or may be when the B time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the B time-saving gaming state may be between when the B time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this B time-saving final variation is completed.

The C time saving game state is a time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit". That is, the condition for transitioning to the C time saving gaming state is to win the time saving hit (the selected symbol command is "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8" time saving hit), and the time saving per display mode is a special symbol. It is derived (determined display) on the display units 163 and 164 . It should be noted that even if the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established, instead of always shifting to the C time-saving gaming state, if the conditions that prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state are established (for example, B time-saving gaming state and (details will be described later), and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "time-saving hit", etc.), C time-saving game Do not transition to state. It should be noted that, when the condition to prevent the transition to the C time-saving gaming state is established despite the fact that the condition for shifting to the C time-saving gaming state is established, the main CPU 201 does not cause the shift to the C time-saving gaming state. to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.

In addition, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is determined in response to the selected symbol command when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit" and the big hit game state based on the "big hit" is started. When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times of shortening (hereinafter referred to as "C specified number of times of shortening") is executed (see "Number of times of shortening" in FIG. 13) It is a case where one of the conditions is satisfied. The C time-saving specified number of times, which is one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving gaming state, is the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving number determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as "C time-saving final variation"). It may be when it is done, or it may be when the C time saving final variation is completed. That is, the end timing of the C time-saving gaming state may be between when the C time-saving final variation is started and until the variable display of the special symbols related to this C time-saving final variation is completed.

In addition, the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state. In addition, the time saving performance of two time saving game states out of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state is the same, and the time saving performance of these two time saving game states and the other one time saving game state You may make it differ from time saving performance. Furthermore, the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and the time saving performance in the C time saving game state may be the same.

In addition, in addition to the above, for the end condition of the A time saving game state, the end condition of the B time saving game state, and the end condition of the C time saving game state, for example, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times Alternatively, the fact that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, the fact that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 146, and the like may be included. Further, in a pachinko game machine including a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the end condition may include that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, a time-saving falling lottery may be performed, and winning of the time-saving falling lottery may be included in the above termination conditions.

[1-4-8. Normal pattern hit judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table that is referred to when determining "per normal symbol" or "losing" by lottery based on the random number value and (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in FIG. 43 described later). .

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for normal symbol hit determination from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol win determination process, the main CPU 201 determines "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted normal symbol win determination random number value. In the normal symbol hit determination table, for each type of time saving, the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined as "normal symbol hit" and the normal symbol per determination value data corresponding to this The relationship and the relationship between the range (width) of the hit determination random number value of the normal symbol determined to be “losing” and the loss determination value data corresponding thereto are defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number is any one of 0 to 79 as a "normal symbol win". Then, the hit/lose determination value data is determined as "normal symbol hit determination value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

In addition, in the time-saving game state A, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 98 as "normal symbol hit", and sets the hit/lose determination value data to "normal". Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the time-saving game state A, when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is 99, the main CPU 201 judges "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/lose determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value is any one of 0 to 79, determines that it is a “normal symbol win”, and sets the hit/loss determination value data to “normal”. Determined as “symbol per judgment value data”. In addition, in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is "losing" when the random number value for winning determination of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and sets the determination value data as "losing determination value data ” is decided.

Thus, in the present embodiment, among the non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state (shown in FIG. 16 selectivity (approximate)) is the highest.

Also, the winning probability per normal symbol in the B time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state (selection rate (rough estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is also the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is not changed.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be made the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to change the ratio of types of normal symbols to be described later for each state without changing the winning probability per normal symbol.

[1-4-9. Normal pattern judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). It is a table referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Selected pattern command at the time of normal design hit" is a command for specifying the normal design hit pattern determined according to the normal design hit type when the result of the hit determination process for the normal design is a normal design hit. be. The normal symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command at the time of the normal symbol hit is selected as follows. be.

For example, in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 is normal even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 0 to 99. , "fz0" is selected as a selection symbol command at the time of a normal symbol hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, and select "fz2" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz5" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz6" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 0 to 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the symbol, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any of 30 to 69, and select the symbol random of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is any one of 70 to 99, "fz9" is selected as the selected symbol command at the normal per symbol.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. After that, referring to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), the normal symbol per selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number for winning determination of the normal symbol and the random number of the normal symbol, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of winning the normal symbol may be determined together.

[1-4-10. Type determination table per normal pattern]
FIG. 18 is an example of a normal per symbol type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal per symbol type determination table selects an opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to a normal per symbol select symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. It is referred to when determining (that is, when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 146 which is executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 of FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz0", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, It is decided that there will be no second opening. That is, the opening pattern is determined such that the normal electric accessory 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz1", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 2500 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at the normal winning symbol is "fz3", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time of 3000 msec, the waiting time of 200 msec, The second open time is determined to be 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command at normal symbol hit is "fz4" and "fz7", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, no wait time, no second release.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, second open time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal winning symbol selection command is "fz6" and "fz9", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2500 msec, wait time 600 msec, second release time 2500 msec.

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the non-time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) open pattern is non- Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the time saving game state, the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the most advantageous degree becomes a disadvantageous mode.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 when the normal electric accessory 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time saving game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is a non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving Among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the C time saving game state, the degree of advantage is the most advantageous mode.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time saving game state is "normal symbol win" is the normal symbol hit determination in the C time saving game state Although the degree of advantage is the same as that of the open pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the result of the processing is "normal pattern hit", the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Fluctuation pattern table of normal patterns]
FIG. 19 is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is used when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (that is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). It is referred to when The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4), normal Determine the variation pattern of the design. The normal symbol effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 300000 msec, regardless of whether the normal symbol effect selection random number is 0-99. The variable display time of normal symbols in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is one of 0 to 89, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of normal symbols is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number is any one of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any one of 0 to 39, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the normal symbol effect selection random value is 40 to 79. , the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and when the normal symbol effect selection random number value is any of 80 to 99, the normal symbol variable display time is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. be.

In this way, the variable display time of normal symbols per one variable display is A The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state is the shortest. Therefore, the A time saving game state is the shortest time until the normal electric accessory 146 is released among the non-time saving game state, A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the B time saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time saving game state, but it is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Time saving number of times set at time saving hit]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol win determination process is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time saving times set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. You may do so.

Further, even in the high probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode for the time-saving win to the special symbol display unit, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving game state, and continues to control to the high-accuracy game state. By the way, for example, like a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, there is known a game machine that turns off a variable probability flag from ON when variable display of special symbols is executed over a specified number of times. In such an ST machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol performed in the final game as a high probability game state is "time saving hit", the time saving hit is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability variation flag. When the processing for deriving the mode is performed later, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode for the time-saving win.

[1-5-2. Overlap of time-saving game state]
When a plurality of time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state overlap. Further, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the C time saving game state and the B time saving game state overlap. When the time saving game state overlaps in this way, the time saving game state may be overlapped and executed, or the time saving game state may not be overlapped (that is, the "time saving win" may be ignored). In addition, so that the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state do not overlap, the A time saving specified number of times, which is the condition for ending the A time saving game state, is smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time saving game state. stipulated.

When the time-saving game state overlaps, a mode in which the time-saving game state is overlapped and a mode in which the time-saving game state is not overlapped will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. Aspect of executing the time-saving game state repeatedly]
As a mode of overlapping and executing the time saving game state when the time saving game state overlaps, the time saving win is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C. Sometimes, there is a mode in which the C time saving game state is repeatedly executed, and a mode in which the B time saving game state is repeatedly executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. A mode in which the C time-saving game state is superimposed on one time-saving game state]
When "time saving win" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 displays the time saving hit in the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Derive the display mode. In this case, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of one time-saving game state, and adopts as the number of times of time-savings the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed before the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied.

For example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the remaining number of time-savings in the A time-saving gaming state is greater than the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 is the A time-saving game. While maintaining the time-saving performance in the game state, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state is exhausted unless a ``big hit'' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 200 times, the "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of the time, although the display mode of the time saving hit is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, the time saving number from here is as long as the "big hit" is not derived. 200 times. Therefore, even if you win the "time saving hit" in any one of the time saving game state A, B time saving game state and C time saving game state, the number of time saving times and time saving performance It is the same as the case where the A time-saving game state is continued without winning the "hit".

On the other hand, for example, in the A time-saving gaming state, if the "time-saving hit" is won, and the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving winning" is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 While maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state, the game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of times of time-saving set based on the 'time-saving win' is completed unless a 'big win' is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state is 20 times, "time saving hit" is elected, and the number of time saving times that can be executed based on this "time saving hit" is 50 In the case of times, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 50 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of times of the time saving game state A, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the A time saving game state, special symbols over 30 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

[1-5-2-1-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but the following description includes the case where the result of the special symbol win determination process includes a small win. .

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, if the remaining number of time saving times in the C time saving game state is larger than the B time saving specified number of times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. , Unless a "jackpot" is derived, control to the time-saving game state is performed until the remaining number of time-saving games in the C time-saving game state is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and when the B time saving prescribed number of times is 200 times, the C time saving game state While maintaining the time saving performance of , the number of times of time saving from here is 300 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the B time-saving specified number of times is greater than the time-saving remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. At the same time, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is completed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed in the B time saving game state is 300 times. In the case, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, the number of time-savings from here is 300 times unless a “jackpot” is derived. That is, even if the variable display of the special design is executed over 20 times, which is the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving game state, after that, while maintaining the time saving performance of the C time saving game state, the special design over 280 times of the difference between the two is further performed.

When the variable display of the special symbols ends in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 . That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "small hit", the small hit display mode is derived, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the losing display mode is derived. . When the small-hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to the small-hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag turned on even during the small-hit game state.

Next, in the ceiling final fluctuation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", that is, in the ceiling final fluctuation, the conditions for transition to the B time saving game state and the transition conditions to the C time saving game state are A case where it is established will be described. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts controlling the B time-saving gaming state before the result of the special symbol win determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the special symbol win determination process is Different control can be executed in the case where the control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after being led to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 .

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. It is already controlled to the B time saving game state at the time of being done. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance in the B time saving game state, and unless a “jackpot” is derived, the larger one of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the time saving number of times in the C time saving game state is consumed. Control to the time-saving game state.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. At the time when it is done, it is not yet controlled to the B time saving game state. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state, and the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, derivation of the display mode of the big win, derivation of the display mode of the small win or a specific small win, etc.) are established. Unless otherwise, control is made to the time saving game state until the larger number of times of time saving of the prescribed number of times of B time saving and the number of times of time saving of C time saving game state is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time saving game state in which the time saving performance is maintained or executed are established, the time saving game state may be terminated.

In addition, when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state and the transition condition to the C time reduction game state are satisfied in the ceiling final fluctuation, the sub CPU 301 performs B time reduction performed only when the transition condition to the B time reduction game state is satisfied. A special display effect different from the transition display effect and the C time saving transition display effect performed when only the condition for transition to the C time saving game state is satisfied may be performed. Alternatively, for example, when the time saving performance of the B time saving game state is maintained, the B time saving transition display effect is performed, and when the time saving performance of the C time saving game state is maintained, the C time saving transition display effect is performed. It is good also as giving priority to one display production|presentation among B time-saving transition display effects, and C time-saving transition display effects, such as performing.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the ceiling final change is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state, B time saving game To control to a jackpot game state without controlling the state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time saving performance when executing multiple time saving game states repeatedly]
In the above, the aspect which overlaps and performs C time saving game state on one time saving game state, and the aspect which overlaps and performs B time saving game state on C time saving game state were demonstrated.

In this way, if it is a specification that can be executed by overlapping a plurality of time-saving game states, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was previously executed is maintained. In a pachinko machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be superimposed may be different, but the time-saving performance of a plurality of time-saving game states that can be superimposed may be the same. preferable.

For example, in the case of a specification that allows the C time-saving game state to be superimposed on one time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state the same. Further, when the specification is such that the B time-saving game state can be superimposed on the C time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state and the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state the same.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later in addition to the time-saving gaming state that is being executed first is, for example, the time-saving gaming state that is executed first. One time saving performance same as the time saving gaming state and another time saving performance different from this one time saving performance may be provided. Then, when the time-saving game state is executed in addition to the time-saving game state that is being executed first, one time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If it is not executed repeatedly, other time-saving performances may be activated.

For example, if it is a pachinko game machine with specifications that can be executed by overlapping the B time-saving game state with the C time-saving game state, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state is the same as the C time-saving game state, and this one time-saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances with other time-saving performances different from the performance are provided. Then, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not in any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Aspect in which the time-saving game state is not repeatedly executed]
As a mode that does not execute the time saving game state repeatedly, there is a mode in which the winning determination process is performed so that the "time saving win" is not included in the lottery target in the time saving game state, and a "time saving win" is included in the lottery target in the time saving game state. A mode (hereinafter referred to as "the latter mode") in which the time-saving game state is not performed repeatedly even if the time-saving game state overlaps is conceivable. As the latter mode, even if winning is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, this is ignored and the time saving game state is repeated. Two modes are conceivable, ie, a non-execution mode and a mode in which even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, this is ignored and the B time saving game state is not repeated. The above two aspects considered as the latter aspect will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode that does not overlap the C time-saving game state with one time-saving game state]
When the "time saving hit" is won in any one of the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B and the time saving game state C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display units 163 and 164 as described above. , derives the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time-saving gaming state based on the “time-saving hit” unless the last special symbol is variablely displayed in one time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving final variation”). The game is controlled to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to one time saving game state (excluding the time saving final variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the one time saving game state is displayed before the display mode of the time saving win is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164. Different control can be executed in the case of ending and in the case of ending one time saving game state when the display mode for time saving per is derived to the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. - 特許庁

First, when one time-saving gaming state ends before the time-saving winning display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 derives the time-saving winning display mode, and then enters the C time-saving gaming state. Start controlling.

Next, when one time-saving gaming state ends when the time-saving per display mode is derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, that is, the derivation of the time-saving per display mode and the end of one time-saving gaming state When performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving gaming state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode for time saving is performed prior to the end process of one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls one time saving game state without controlling to the C time saving game state. End the time-saving game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode for the time saving game prior to the ending process of the time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the process of deriving (confirmed display) the display mode of the time saving per is performed after the end process of the one time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the one time saving game state and controls to the C time saving game state. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time saving performance of the one time saving game state, but sets the time saving performance of the C time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the one time-saving gaming state without controlling to the C time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the one time-saving gaming state is unprocessed at the time when the display mode for the time-saving winning is derived, If the end processing of one time-saving game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Aspect in which the B time-saving game state is not superimposed on the C time-saving game state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving game state, the main CPU 201 responds to the display mode derived to the special symbol display units 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process). Execute control.

First, in the ceiling final variation, the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", "minor hit" or "losing" will be described.

In the C time saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination processing in the final ceiling change is "time saving hit", "small hit" or "losing", the main CPU 201 completes the time saving remaining number of times in the C time saving game state. Control to the C time saving game state until it is done.

However, when the remaining time saving count in the C time saving game state is 0 in the final ceiling change, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed prior to the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state and controls to the B time saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time saving game state without controlling to the B time saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state without controlling to the B time-saving gaming state if the end processing of the C time-saving gaming state is not processed at the time when the B time-saving gaming state is to be started, and the C time-saving gaming state is terminated. If the end processing of the game state has already been performed, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving game state after the start processing of the B time saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving game state.

In the final ceiling change, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "big hit", the main CPU 201 ends the C short game state and starts control of the big win game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power failure signal is at High level (S11). It goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table, although not shown, prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at High level (NO in S11), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when S11 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

At S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this process, the ON/OFF state of the backup clear switch 176 and the ON/OFF state of the setting key 174 are saved. That is, the ON/OFF states of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are stored in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . Also, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the activation wait of the sub-control circuit 300 side is performed. The startup waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation of the sub-control circuit 300, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, interrupt request signal check processing, WDT output processing when an interrupt request signal is generated, and initialization of various sensors at a predetermined timing. Output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before activation (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203, it is determined whether the power interruption is normal or abnormal.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that there was a normal power outage (if S14 determines YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15). Verification processing of the checksum value of the area is performed (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the collation result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, that it is normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (if determined as YES in S17), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

At S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the determination is NO, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off and either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is turned off. If one of them is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO determination in S18), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. Note that the processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of setting key 174 and backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 turns on the security signal of the external terminal. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs error display processing on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets error display data to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170 . As a result, a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up to display an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are determined to be on, the first pachinko gaming machine is not allowed to play a game.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S<b>21 , the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the activation control flag area within the main RAM 203 . This processing is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and stores again the value indicating that the setting has been changed. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S<b>22 , the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs activation state determination processing. In this process, based on the value of the activation control flag stored in the activation control flag area in the main RAM 203, the current activation state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, a clearing process (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.) of a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is performed. It should be noted that this processing is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S<b>25 , the main CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, an initial setting process is performed according to the current activation state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clearing). Note that the details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 . After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt prohibition processing. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs power-off processing. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. Details of the power-off process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 .

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial random number. In this process, the initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a special symbol jackpot determination random number counter, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (when S29 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 saves the register. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S<b>32 , the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor total calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Also, this processing is performed using an area (outside area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

At S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has passed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (eg, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO determination in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S35), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the main control main process, before the execution of various processes (for example, the processing of S37 ~ S44) relating to the game control described later, for example, 6msec interrupt prohibition section (S26 ~ S35 processing section) is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system period), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is three times the interrupt period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (eg, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system periodic management timer area within the working area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, command transmission/reception processing for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. The details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

At S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. The details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs game operation display unit control processing. In this process, the setting process of the display data output to each display part (for example, 1st special design display part 163, 2nd special design display part 164 etc.) of the LED unit 160 is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

At S42, the main CPU 201 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, control processing of the external terminal board pulse signal, processing of setting the output data, processing of generating the test firing test signal, and the like are performed. Note that the process of generating the test-firing test signal is performed using an area (outside area) separate from the work area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs state monitoring processing. In this process, firing position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the firing position determination process, if there is a change in the firing position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), transmission of a firing position command is reserved. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes after S26.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed at S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the activation control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S<b>52 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating power failure recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the power failure recovery (when S52 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, it is a value indicating RAM clear (NO determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation status flag indicates setting change or setting confirmation (YES determination in S54), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation command transmission reservation process. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

At S56, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the first normal game preprocessing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 terminates the startup initial setting process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power interruption process performed at S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is ON (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not ON (NO determination in S61), the main CPU 201 terminates the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (YES in S61), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S<b>63 , the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203 . In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

At S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded at S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S72), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S72 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S73), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S74 that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO in S74), the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S74 determines YES), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S75. to

Returning to S73, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S73 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs the process of Move to S75.

At S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the first pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the starting information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 140 .

[1-6-5. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0" (when S72 determines YES), in the special symbol management process, when S73 determines YES, the second special symbol is to be processed, and when S74 determines YES, The first special symbol is to be processed. Further, when the control state number is not "0" (when S72 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is performed on the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers of the special symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26). .

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (when S81 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

At S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S83 based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S83 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S84 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

At S85, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S85 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S86.

At S86, the main CPU 201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. This process of S86 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S87.

At S87, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening opening control process. The process of S87 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot ending process. This process of S88 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 at S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S91), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S91 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol win determination processing is a time saving hit, and sets the big win flag to ON when the special symbol win determination processing result is a big win. do. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol win determination process does not include a small win, but if the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, the special symbol win When the result of the judgment processing is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94. The time saving flag is turned off when shifting to the C time saving game state, and the big win flag is turned off when the big win game state is started. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win as a result of the special symbol win determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process for determining whether or not the hit is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that this process is not a big hit, a process for determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, If it is determined in this process that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a loss.

At S94, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referred to, and the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of winning types, a plurality of losing types may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and a plurality of types of such small wins may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the reach determination random value Or/and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. It should be noted that the variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state or the like. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

At S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 27 S84) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S99.

At S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section, and executes the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S100), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited interval. It is preferable to use

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S111), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S111 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S113.

At S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S114.

At S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S121), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S121 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S122, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (if YES in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124. Signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control of S123, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), game state designation parameter setting processing (S128), and transmission reservation processing (S129) of a big hit start display command. In addition, by performing the process (S127) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 27 S86) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, if it is determined in S122 that there is no big win, that is, the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO in S122), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

At S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). The details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

At S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

At S133, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a loss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[1-6-10. Time saving management processing]
Next, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S131 during the special symbol game ending processing (see FIG. 31) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs counter determination processing. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving management process, and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, referring to FIG. 33, counter update processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 at S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time saving counter update process (S151). The details of this time saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 . After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time saving counter update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S151 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, the time saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a process when a plurality of time saving game states are superimposed and executed when a plurality of time saving game states overlap.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, YES determination is made when both the time saving flag ON and the time saving counter being greater than 0 are satisfied, and NO determination is made if either one is not satisfied.

The time saving flag is set to ON when shifting to the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state. In addition, when shifting to the high certainty gaming state, the probability variation flag is set to ON.

The time saving counter indicates the number of time saving times executed in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state.

When the condition for shifting to the A time saving game state, B time saving game state or/and C time saving game state is satisfied, a time saving counter for the time saving game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is set.

In this embodiment, the time saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time saving game state is terminated when the time saving counter reaches 0, but this is not the only method. Instead, an addition system may be adopted in which the time saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbols is completed, and the time saving game state is ended when the time saving counter reaches the set time saving number. In addition, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special design ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special design, and when the time-saving counter becomes 0 ( In the case of the subtraction method) or when the time saving counter reaches the set number of times of the time saving (in the case of the addition method), the time saving game state may be completed.

In S161, when it is determined that both the time saving flag ON and that the time saving counter is greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO determination in S161), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process, and the process is Return to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S<b>163 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 3 and the C time saving counter is larger than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S163 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S164.

In addition, the C time saving counter is a counter which is set when the transition condition to the C time saving game state is satisfied during the time saving game state. Although not shown in the flow chart, the C time reduction counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time reduction counter, which will be described later, is set.

Time-saving mode is a flag that is set when a plurality of time-saving gaming states are superimposed and executed. In the present embodiment, the time saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the previously executed time saving game state, "time saving mode=3" is set. Further, when the B time-saving game state is superimposed on the time-saving game state that is being executed first, the "time-saving mode=2" is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S163 that both the time saving mode=3 and the C time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S163), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C short working hours counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S165.

In S<b>165 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than zero. In this process, when the time saving mode is 2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S166.

In addition, the B time saving counter is a counter that is set when the transition condition to the B time saving game state is established during the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, during the C time saving game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, the B time saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time saving counter is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S165 that both of the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 terminates the time saving counter update process. , the process is returned to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In addition, although not shown, when the C time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S164, or when the B time reduction counter = 0 as a result of performing the processing of S166, the main CPU 201 Set the mode to off (=0).

By the way, when a plurality of time-saving game states are overlapped and executed, not only two time-saving game states are overlapped, but three or more time-saving game states may be overlapped and executed. In this case, since the A time saving game state and the C time saving game state do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time saving game states overlap is the A time saving game state or the B time saving game state. It corresponds to the case where one or more C time-saving gaming states overlap, and the case where three or more C time-saving gaming states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 at S152 during the counter update process (see FIG. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, when the variable probability flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203 .

In addition, the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko game machine as a transition condition to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot game state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when the dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. You may make it process.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if the determination in S171 is NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and shifts the process to the counter update process ( 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF (determined as YES in S171), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

At S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter judgment processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 36, counter determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 at S142 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving transition determination processing (S181). The details of this time saving shift determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 . After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S<b>182 , the main CPU 201 performs time saving transition processing. The details of this time-saving transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 . After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S<b>183 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than one.

When it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is not smaller than 1 (NO determination in S183), that is, when the time saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S185.

In addition, when it is determined that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 in S183 (S183 is YES determination), both the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter should be smaller than 1 (that is, should be 0). However, in view of the possibility that some trouble may occur in executing the processing by the main CPU 201, for example, even though the determination is YES in S183, if the B time saving counter or the time saving counter is 1 or more , an abnormality warning may be output, or other abnormality processing may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormal time process, when S183 is determined as YES, not only turn off the time saving flag (see S184), but also reset the B time saving counter and C time saving counter. You may make it match|compatibility with a counter, a B time saving counter, and a C time saving counter.

At S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) of the time saving transition command. In addition, the time-saving transition command transmitted in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time reduction shift determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the time reduction transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a determination process for shifting to the B time-saving game state is performed. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction transition determination processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S181 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and the process is changed to a counter determination process ( 36). That is, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the variable probability flag is off (when S191 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is the ceiling value.

When it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not the ceiling value (NO determination in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction shift determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is the ceiling value (when S192 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

At S196, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time reduction transition determination process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time reduction transition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving transition processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S182 during the counter determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variable probability flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO determination in S202), that is, if the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition processing, and the processing is changed to the counter determination processing (Fig. 36). By doing so, when the probability variation flag is ON, neither the B time saving game state nor the C time saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the variable probability flag is off (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not ON (NO in S203), that is, if the ceiling flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is ON (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time reductions to be set in the B time reduction counter, setting the time reduction mode to 2, time reduction performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of times of time saving set in the B time saving counter is a predetermined number of times. Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time saving hit flag is ON.

In S206, when it is determined that the time saving hit flag is not ON (when S206 is NO determination), that is, when the time saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and the process is changed to the counter determination process. (See FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S206 that the time saving hit flag is ON (S206 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the C time saving gaming state. In this process, the number of times of time saving to be set in the C time saving counter, setting the time saving mode to 3, time saving performance and the like are determined. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time reductions set in the C time reduction counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to a hit type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13). Further, among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of the "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol win determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see FIG. 18). It is as it should be. Furthermore, among the time saving performances, the variable display time of normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving setting process. The details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process, and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time saving setting processing]
Next, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 . FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 at S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is ON (when S211 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S212.

If S211 is YES determination, the probability variation flag is off, for example, when the B time-saving gaming state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving gaming state is being executed first (ceiling counter = ceiling value case), or when the C time-saving game state is repeated while the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first (when winning the “time-saving win”) do.

In addition, although not shown, when the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time-saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and determines in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, or the C time saving game state is executed first, and the C time saving game state is executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". Along with this, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

When it is determined in S211 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO determination in S211), that is, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-savings (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and compares the current time-saving counter. It is determined whether or not the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of times of time saving.

In S212, when it is determined that the current time saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time saving times (NO determination in S212), that is, when the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of time saving times, the main CPU 201 makes the time saving The setting process is ended, and the process is returned to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S212 that the current time saving counter is greater than the new number of times of time saving (when S212 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving counter resetting process. In this process, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed while the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state is executed first. When the C time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where it is, the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter (that is, the number of remaining time-savings) and the new number of time-savings is reset as a new time-saving counter. . However, even if the time saving counter resetting process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the B time saving counter and the C time saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time-saving game state is repeatedly executed in the state where the C time-saving game state is executed first, or when the A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state is executed first , the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the previously executed time saving game state. That is, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed earlier is changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, or the time-saving game corresponding to the larger one of the current time-saving counter and the new time-saving number of times It will not be changed to the time saving performance of the state.

The time-saving performance, as described above, is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment), , the variable display time of normal symbols, and/or the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time, etc.) of normal electric accessories 146, and the like.

By the way, in this embodiment, by providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter, it is possible to manage that the two time-saving game states are being overlapped internally. Then, in the time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger one of the current value of the time-saving counter and the new number of times of time-savings is reset as a new time-savings counter. However, even if the two time-saving gaming states are executed internally, the time-saving performance that appears superficially (that the player can grasp) is the two time-saving gaming states that are internally overlapped. Among them, it is only the time saving performance for any one time saving game state. Therefore, without managing that the two time-saving game states are run in piles internally (that is, without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), when multiple time-saving game states are run repeatedly , You may make it reset as a new time-saving counter the number of times of time-savings which is larger among the value of the present time-saving counter and the number of times of new time-savings.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving mode setting process. This process is, if S211 is NO determination, that is, if it is executed by shifting from the non-time-saving gaming state to the B time-saving gaming state (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state It is a process that is performed when it is executed by shifting to (when it is elected to "time saving"). In this process, the time saving frequency and time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving setting process and returns the process to the time saving transition process (FIG. 38).

Thus, in the above-described time saving management process described with reference to FIGS. going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine that includes a small hit in the result of the hit determination process of the hit determination process, the first in the final ceiling fluctuation The result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs the process of shifting to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small win game state. do it.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change ends. However, it is not limited to this, and based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, the transition processing to the B time saving game state may be performed. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling change, B time saving game It is preferable to perform state transition processing. This is because, when the variable display of the special pattern as the final ceiling change is completed, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made, during the variable display of one of the special patterns as the final ceiling change, the other special pattern is variable. This is because, when the display is started, the other variable display of the special symbols cannot receive the benefit of the B time-saving game state, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered. In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, variable display of special symbols is not performed with a long variation such as 600000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine capable of variable display of special symbols with such a long variation, transition processing to the B time-saving game state is performed based on the start of variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling variation. As a result, delay in starting the B time-saving game state can be avoided even when variable display of the special symbol, which is the final ceiling variation, is performed in a long variation.

In addition, in the time saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time saving game state is changed to the C time saving game state. (See S203 to S207 in FIG. 38), but it is not limited to this. For example, the C time reduction control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time reduction game state is prioritized over the B time reduction control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time reduction game state. You can also use

Further, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35), the ceiling counter is not updated. can't For example, in a ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability drop lottery, even if the variable probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state is not performed, and when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving game state may be made. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time-saving gaming state only when "ceiling counter=ceiling value", but shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability variable counter becomes the ceiling value. processing will be performed.

In addition, it is preferable that the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, be within a predetermined range (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off is 1/319 (if the set value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving gaming state, is up to a prescribed multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is off by a specified number (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 3. up to 8 times). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (when the set value is 1), both the prescribed number of B time reduction and the prescribed number of C time reduction are approximately 1212 (319 × 3.8) is preferably set as the upper limit. In addition, it is not essential to set the upper limit of the B time saving prescribed number of times and the upper limit of the C time saving prescribed number of times to the same value.

By the way, as in the first pachinko game machine, in the case of a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities such as setting 1 to setting 6, as described above , Time saving per probability is a common probability for all set values. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state, is a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number (eg, 3.0) regardless of the set value. In this case, the ceiling value will differ according to the set value, and there is a risk that the set value will be seen through by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of which set value is set, the ceiling value is determined by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (if the variable probability flag is off) by a specified number, It is preferable to use the same value regardless of the set value.

[1-6-18. Modified example related to time saving management processing]
In addition, in the above-described time-saving management processing (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management processing of the present embodiment") described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the ceiling counter update processing (see FIG. 35) is (see FIG. 31). Further, the processing related to the transition to the B time saving game state is given priority over the processing related to the transition to the C time saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are provided separately, and when the ceiling flag is on, it is shifted to the B time-saving game state, When the time saving hit flag is ON, it is made to shift to the C time saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority of the transition to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state It is not restricted to the above about whether it makes a shift flag separate or it is made common, but can perform time saving management processing by various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the B time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set at the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to when the fluctuation is stopped, the process at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving game state, and the transition flag to the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state transition flag may be provided separately.

Also, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of stopping the fluctuation, and after confirming that the "time saving hit" is not elected when reaching the ceiling, it is shifted to the B time saving game state. good.

Furthermore, when a plurality of time-saving game states are not executed repeatedly, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0; should not be subtracted.

[1-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 201 at S86 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S251), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S251 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S252.

At S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. A count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S253 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S254. On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

At S254, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the processing (S254) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (Fig. 27 S88) is performed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

At S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S258.

At S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 131, the number of prize balls when winning the large winning opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of rounds corresponds to the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 . It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S259.

At S259, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the process of generating the opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 131 is performed. After executing the process of S259, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S260.

At S260, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S260) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S261.

At S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

At S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO determination in S271), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S271 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S272.

At S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) for counting the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum winning number. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S272), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S273.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 131 is the maximum winning number (when S272 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S258 in FIG. 40) has passed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 131 has not elapsed (NO in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 131 has passed (YES in S273), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S274.

At S<b>274 , the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the special symbol control state number to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S275) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

At S276, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs an inter-round display command transmission reservation process. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S281), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot ending process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S281 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

At S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S283.

At S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Needless to say, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 43 are normal symbol control state numbers. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in FIG. 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

When it is determined in S291 that the wait time for the normal symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S291), the main CPU 201 terminates the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292.

At S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. It should be noted that the main CPU 201 performs the processes after S293 based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

At S293, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S293 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol variation pattern determination process, and the normal symbol hit determination process. 146 opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, waiting time) setting processing is performed. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S294 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending variable display of normal symbols. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S295.

At S295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S295 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal design game determination process, the determination process of the normal design derivation result (for example, normal design hit or loss) is performed. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S296.

At S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory release process. This process of S296 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric accessory 146 is opened in a predetermined manner. Incidentally, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol per end processing. This process of S297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the normal symbol per end process ends, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16), the normal symbol hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 99, for example, 0 to 79. It is normally used as per design judgment value data (in the case of non-time-saving game state). Since the normal symbol winning probability is determined by the number of normal symbol winning determination value data with respect to the total random number of the winning determination random numbers of the normal symbols, for example, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the probability per normal symbol is different between when the time reduction control is executed and when the time reduction control is not executed, but it may be the same or substantially the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600000 msec in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not performed, whereas in a game state in which time-saving control is performed, relatively for example, 1000 msec. Only runs for a short time. Thus, when the time saving control is executed, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessary product opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 44, external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of main CPU 201 will be described. This processing is interrupt processing that is performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when power is cut off. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

At S<b>302 , the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205 . For the predetermined input ports mentioned above, for example, the states of power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. are set. is an input port that After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S<b>303 , the main CPU 201 determines whether power failure is detected.

If it is determined in S303 that the power failure has not been detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that power failure has been detected in S303 (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area within the work area of the main RAM 203 . After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing of the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 terminates the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 45, system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of 2 msec, for example, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, the power failure is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, the power failure is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and shifts the process to S315.

At S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in the game permitted state based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start-up control flag is a flag for determining which of power-off recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like, the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of power failure recovery, it is determined to be in the game permitted state, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined not to be in the game permitted state.

The activation control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, power failure recovery is performed. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the setting is changed. If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (when S315 determines NO), the main CPU 201 performs setting control processing (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process performed at intervals of, for example, 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326. Details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the shooting of game balls from the shooting device 6 (see FIG. 6), sets a specific switch (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). etc.), it is preferable to set the disabling of various switches, prohibition of payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (when S315 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes processing for adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt disabled sections during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt period timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec) management, and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area within the work area of the main RAM 203 .

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot judgment random number counters, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to secure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout of balls. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S322.

At S322, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs register save processing. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, even if the RAM is cleared, for example. data is stored in an area that is not cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 restores the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 restores the protection register saved in S311, and terminates the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the setting control process performed at S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

When it is determined in S331 that the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (when S331 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting change processing (S332). The details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag does not indicate a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the activation control flag indicates confirmation of setting.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the activation control flag indicates the setting confirmation (when S333 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the setting confirmation process (S334), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337. .

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs setting operation display processing. In this process, the currently set setting values are displayed. After executing the process of S335, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S336.

At S336, the main CPU 201 performs effect control command transmission processing. In this process, the command (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 25) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 . After executing the process of S336, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed in S332 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This processing is performed by reading information set in the input port of the I/O port 205 .

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (NO in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (YES in S341), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S342.

In S<b>342 , the main CPU 201 performs update processing within the set value range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process. You may enable it to change a setting value by operating.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 is turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO in S343), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (YES in S343), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, as described above, when the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed at S334 during the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the above-described setting change process (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (NO determination in S351), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 determines YES), the main CPU 201 performs second normal game pre-processing (S352). The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Incidentally, as described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in the game permission state. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also carried out as the initial setting processing when the RAM is cleared in the initial setting processing at startup (see FIG. 24) when none of the recovery from power failure, setting change and setting confirmation is performed. .

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, the area in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "backup area") is cleared (for example, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area in which data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203 . That is, the data backed up when the power is cut off is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, and the game permission flag is set to ON to enter the game permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs initialization command transmission reservation processing. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When the first normal game pre-processing is finished, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is in a game permission state.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area within the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the constructed work area within the main RAM 203 . The above data are, for example, game state information, ON/OFF states of special symbol and normal symbol hit flags, pending number information, and other various information necessary for the progress of the game. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this processing, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power cutoff, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is entered. After executing the RAM setting process (S371) at power failure recovery, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable probability flag is ON. This processing is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 .

When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S372), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S372 that the variable probability flag is ON (when S372 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the variable probability notification flag to ON. This is done in order to notify the state of the variable probability flag at the time of power failure recovery. When the probability variation notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability variation notification LED (not shown) to be lit. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the variable probability flag is on when power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the processing of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes starting opening winning detection processing (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S382). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set at the time of winning to the general winning opening 122 . After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won in the special winning opening 131 . After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passing detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, based on the fact that the passage gate switch 127 has detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 126, various random numbers for normal symbols (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted. . It should be noted that the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.), and reserves the normal symbols until the conditions for starting the normal symbols are satisfied. It has a starting memory area (1) to a normal symbol starting memory area (4). Then, in the ball passing detection process, it is extracted based on whether or not there is an empty area in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), that is, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. It is also determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting entrance winning detection process]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 201 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (S391).

When it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 121 (NO determination in S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the first special symbol jackpot determination random number, the first special symbol symbol random number, the first special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the first special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has an area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). In addition to the first special symbol start storage area (1) to first special symbol start storage area (4), the main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, if it is the upper limit of 4 (NO determination in S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4 (YES in S393), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S394.

At S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first special symbols. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

At S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 120 in the main RAM 203 until the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch determination processing. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of special symbols, performing a hit determination process, etc., using the random number value extracted in S392 prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the prefetch flag is set.

Note that the look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the time when the random number value is extracted in S392 and the time when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol is started. Considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead effect before and after the process of S395, for example, it is preferable to perform the process before and after. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S397.

At S397, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command of the first special symbol is a command including information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, the variation pattern information of the first special symbol (that is, the variation pattern command of the special symbol), etc. In this process, The winning command of the first special symbol reserved for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

At S<b>398 , the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 has detected a game ball.

If it is determined that the game ball has not been detected by the second starting opening switch 141 (NO determination in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process, and changes the process to switch input detection processing (Fig. 51).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 141 (when S398 determines YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, the second special symbol jackpot determination random number, the second special symbol symbol random number, the second special symbol ready-to-win determination random number, and the second special symbol Various random numbers such as random numbers for effect selection) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second start opening winning prize. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning to the second starting port 140 is less than four, for example.

In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 140 until the starting condition is satisfied. It has a symbol start storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). . In addition to the second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (4), the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start storage area (0), which will be described later.

When the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, when the upper limit is 4 (when S400 determines NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start opening winning detection process, and changes the process to the switch input detection process. (See FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4 (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of second special symbols. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

At S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command of the second special symbol (S403). The winning command of the second special symbol is a command including information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, the variation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc., and the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 terminates the start opening winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub control processing]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization processing, for example, initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, and the like is performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S502.

Note that the initialization process (S501) described above is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs read processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes effect mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) The manner of sound production and the like are determined.

In the effect mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the content of the effect, and based on the generated animation request, generates various requests (for example, a drawing request) for operating various effect devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, and character requests). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for causing the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301 , the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or part of the LEDs forming the LED group 46 . After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role product control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the role product request to the role product control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on a message (a role request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 controls the performance drive motor (not shown) for all or part of the performance roles constituting the performance role group 58. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of effect mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs effect mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200. FIG.

Sub CPU301, as one of the various processes performed in the production mode determination process, for example, the production pattern of the sub-variation production corresponding to this special symbol fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as "the relevant fluctuation") (hereinafter "sub-variation A sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern"), a prefetch effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern of the prefetch effect (hereinafter referred to as a "prefetch effect pattern"), etc. are performed. In addition, in the effect mode determination process, the effect mode is determined, for example, a countdown effect that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, or a B time-saving game state transition effect that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. Processing, etc., is also performed for determination processing of various effects related to the progress of the game.

The sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation production pattern is a production pattern that is performed in the display area of the display device 7 by the sub CPU 301 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols (for example, a variation pattern of decorative symbols or a character production patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variation production, depending on the sub-variation production pattern to be executed, with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop of the special symbol, the expectation for the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol It is possible to indicate that the degree is maintained or increased.

The sub-fluctuation effect patterns include, for example, time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, big hit system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 to be described later. is included. As described above, the time-saving hit system reach A, B, C is a reach indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a big hit) It is a performance. The jackpot type reach A, B, and C are reach effects indicating that the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

In addition, for example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect indicating the transition timing to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the ready-to-win effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 preferentially executes one of the effects. good.

The look-ahead effect pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, a special symbol variation pattern determined as a result of the look-ahead determination process. The look-ahead effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for the result of the look-ahead determination process. is provided for the hit determination processing of the special symbols (until the variable display of the special symbols is started), the sub-CPU 301 performs in the display area of the display device 7.

In the look-ahead effect, according to the look-ahead effect pattern to be executed, when in the pending state, with the passage of time (more specifically, the progress of the variable display of the previously held start information), the look-ahead judgment It is possible to indicate that the degree of expectation for the outcome of the processing is maintained or increased.

The look-ahead effect is performed using a pending image displayed on the display device 7, for example. The pending image is an image showing the current pending status.

The look-ahead effect pattern includes a look-ahead determination process, that is, a result type of the special symbol hit determination process (whether it is a time-saving hit or a big hit). A look-ahead expected value production pattern capable of suggesting an expected value for the result of the win determination process being a win (big win or short-time win) is included. That is, in the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest both or one of the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process and the expected value for the result of the special symbol hit determination process to be a hit. is. Also, in the look-ahead effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described later), the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described later) and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. See) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type effect pattern, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-fluctuation effect pattern decision processing]
First, the sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table (detailed description is omitted) in the game state (normal game state) in which the time saving flag is off. This sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probable short-time gaming state) in which the time-saving flag is on, but the description is omitted here.

The sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation production pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, displays as a variation production pattern corresponding to the variation. A sub-variation effect pattern (illustrated as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the device 7 is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-fluctuation production pattern includes time-saving hit system reach A, B, C, jackpot system reach A, B, C, and common reach A, B, C, D, E. there is

The time-saving hit system reach A, B, and C are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of time-saving winning as described above, and are ready-to-reach performances in which the possibility of time-saving winning can be grasped from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a loss or a big hit, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Fig. 15). reference). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a prefetch target sub-variation production pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a pre-read sub-variation production pattern. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C are the same or substantially the same in appearance appearance. However, the time saving system reach B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching, while the time saving per system reach C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern for prefetching ("prefetching flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and See FIG. 55 below).

The big hit system reach A, B, and C are the reach effects indicating the possibility of the big win as described above, and are the reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of the big win from the appearance. The jackpot system reach A is not displayed when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss or a "time saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "time saving hit". 15). This big hit type ready-to-win A is not a prefetch target sub-fluctuation effect pattern, but is not limited to this, and may be a prefetch-type sub-fluctuation effect pattern. The big-hit reach B and the big-hit reach C have the same or substantially the same performance mode in appearance. However, the big-hit ready-to-win B is not a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead, while the big-hit ready-to-win C is a sub-fluctuation effect pattern to be read ahead (refer to the column of "look-ahead flag" in FIG. 15).

The common reach A, B, C, D, and E are reach performances indicating that there is a possibility of either a big hit or a short time hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a short time hit or a big hit. It is a reach production mode that it is difficult to grasp whether there is a possibility. The common reach A is a win (big hit, short time hit) fixed reach production which is not displayed when the result of the special pattern hit determination processing is a loss, and is displayed only when it is a big hit or a "short time hit". (See FIG. 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same presentation mode in appearance. Further, the common reach D is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit system reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big hit system reach C. In addition, common reach A and common reach B are not prefetch target sub-variation effect patterns, while common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are pre-read target sub-variation effect patterns ("Prefetch in FIG. 15 flags column).

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 . Then, the sub CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub fluctuation effect pattern.

[1-9-2. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process and a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process, which are performed as the look-ahead effect pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, in the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6), the first special symbol start storage area (0) provided in the main RAM 203, the first special symbol start storage area (1), the first special symbol start storage area (2) , the first special symbol start storage area (3), and the first special symbol start storage area (4) as areas corresponding to the first sub reservation area (0), the first sub reservation area (1), the first There is provided one sub-reservation area (2), a first sub-reservation area (3) and a first sub-reservation area (4). In the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), various items related to the extracted random value Hold information is stored. In addition, information corresponding to the variation is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the first sub reservation area (0). When the sub CPU 301 receives the winning command for the first starting opening winning, it stores the received information in the first sub reservation area corresponding to the current first special symbol starting storage area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol start storage area (0), a second special symbol start storage area (1), a second special symbol start storage area (2), and a second special symbol provided in the main RAM 203. As areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second sub-reserving area (0), the second sub-reserving area (1), the second sub-reserving area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3) and a second sub-reservation area (4) are provided.

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the look-ahead effect for the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, but is not limited to this, and in other game states (for example, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) It may be performed, or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The look-ahead effect is performed using, for example, a pending image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 . In the display area of the display device 7, the 0th area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0), the first reservation area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (1), the first A second reservation area corresponding to the sub reservation area (2), a third reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (3), and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first sub reservation area (4) are provided. there is

[1-9-2-1. Table referred to in look-ahead per type production pattern determination processing]
First, the table referred to in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process will be described.

By the way, in the form of the pending image in which the prefetch effect is executed in the determined prefetch hit type effect pattern, there is a time saving prefetch effect form indicating that there is a possibility of a time saving hit and a possibility of a big hit. A big hit system look-ahead effect form shown and a common hit system look-ahead effect form showing that there is a possibility for both a time saving hit and a big hit are included.

The read-ahead winning type production pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win-type read-ahead production form to a time-saving winning-type read-ahead production form, or changes from a common winning-type look-ahead production form to a big win-type look-ahead production form. Thus, it is an effect pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value with respect to the result type of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

FIG. 55 is an example of a read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number determination table. In FIG. 55, only the fluctuation patterns to be read ahead among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 54 are shown. Also, FIG. 56 is an example of a per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. , based on the variation pattern and the pending number. The pending number here includes start information to be prefetched. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting port 120 is withheld, the number of reservations after the reservation corresponds to the number of reservations shown in FIG.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the look-ahead per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the per-read-ahead type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. 56 to determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern. More specifically, as shown in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "prefetching winning type effect pattern determination table number" is indicated as "SASPT number", and the "prefetching winning type effect pattern" is indicated as "SAS effect pattern". The sub effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received.

For example, when the read-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "55", the read-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined as "07H". Further, for example, when the look-ahead winning type effect pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted sub-effect selection random number value 1 is "77", the look-ahead winning type effect pattern is determined as "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (corresponding to reservation) in FIG. 56 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a time-saving hit system look-ahead performance form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a time-saving hit. When the pending image is displayed in the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of the time-saving hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a big hit type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit. When the pending image is displayed in the big-hit look-ahead presentation mode, it can be grasped from the appearance that there is a possibility of a big-hit.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a common winning type look-ahead effect form indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is possible for both the time saving winning and the big winning. When the reserved image is displayed in the common winning type look-ahead presentation mode, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether there is a possibility of a time-saving win or a big win.

For example, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "07H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect form is displayed in the third reservation area, and the common hit system is displayed in the second reservation area after shifting from the third reservation area. A look-ahead effect form is displayed. Then, when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the common winning system prefetching performance form changes to the time saving prefetching performance form, and the time saving prefetching performance form of "A" is displayed in the first reservation area. be done.

Further, when the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit-type look-ahead effect pattern of "C" is displayed in the third reservation area. Then, when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area, the common hit system look-ahead performance form changes to the big hit system look-ahead performance form, the second reservation area, and the first reservation after shifting from the second reservation area In the area, the big-hit type anticipation effect form of "B" is displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 56, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern includes the following patterns a) to e). In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type look-ahead production form to the time saving type look-ahead production form, and the pattern of changing from the time saving type look-ahead production form to the big and short winning type look-ahead production form are the look-ahead type production patterns. Although not included in the pattern, these patterns may be included in the look-ahead hit type effect pattern.
B) At the time of suspension, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed, and after that, the time-saving hit-type look-ahead production form is displayed without changing the production form. "09H").
b) A pre-reading big hit effect pattern (for example, a pre-reading hit type effect pattern "17H") in which the big hit type prefetch effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big win type prefetch effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter. ).
c) A common winning type look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and then a look-ahead common winning performance pattern A (for example, a look-ahead winning type look-ahead performance pattern "24H") that changes to a time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form.
d) A read-ahead common win effect pattern B (for example, a look-ahead win type effect pattern "12H") that is displayed in a common win-type look-ahead effect form at the time of suspension and then changes to a big win-type look-ahead effect form.
E) A look-ahead common win effect pattern C (for example, a look-ahead common win effect pattern C in which the common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the common win-type look-ahead effect form is displayed without changing the effect form thereafter (for example, a look-ahead win type look-ahead effect pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55), and based on the variation pattern and the number of reservations, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number ). Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the sub effect selection random number value 1, A look-ahead hit type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) is determined.

Note that FIG. 56 does not show the look-ahead winning type performance pattern in which the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form of "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and then changes to the big hit-type look-ahead performance form of "B". However, in this way, the sub CPU 301 may determine the look-ahead hit type effect pattern that changes from the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect form of "A" to the big win-type look-ahead effect form of "B". By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

Also, in FIG. 56, as described above, the big hit look-ahead effect form "B" indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit (that is, there is a possibility of losing). In addition to the production form, a big hit confirmation look-ahead production form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the look-ahead winning type effect pattern determined by the sub CPU 301 may include any or all of the following look-ahead type effect patterns f) to h).
f) A look-ahead big-win determination performance pattern A in which the big-win determination look-ahead performance form is displayed at the time of suspension, and the big-hit determination look-ahead performance form is displayed without changing the performance form thereafter.
g) At the time of suspension, other prefetch production forms (for example, "A" short-time hit prefetch production form, "B" big hit prefetch production form, "C" common hit prefetch production form, etc.) are displayed. After that, a look-ahead big win confirmation performance pattern B that changes to a big win determination look-ahead performance form.
h) At the time of suspension, other prefetch effect forms (for example, "A" time-saving hit prefetch effect form, "C" common hit prefetch effect form, etc.) are displayed, and then "B" big hit system. A look-ahead big win fixed performance pattern C in which a look-ahead performance form is displayed and then changed to a big win fixed look-ahead performance form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit system look-ahead production form of "A", the big hit system look-ahead production form of "B", and the common hit system look-ahead production form of "C", at the time of suspension, "C" Although the display frequency of the common hit type look-ahead effect form is the highest, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form of "A" may be the highest, and at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the big hit-type look-ahead effect form of "B" may be the highest. You can make it higher. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common win-type look-ahead effect form of "C" may be the lowest at the time of suspension.

Also, in FIG. 56, a random number 1 for sub-effect selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "prefetched per-type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not restrictive, and specific SASPT numbers are assigned. No sub effect selection random number value is assigned only to (that is, the distribution rate of a specific SASPT number is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Table referenced in look-ahead expected value production pattern determination process]
Next, the table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value production pattern determination table (at the time of winning) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is "shorter working hours" or "big hit". Also, FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) that is referred to when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs in the effect form according to the expected value for the hit (time-saving hit, big hit).

When a pending image is displayed as a look-ahead effect form for saving time, for example, the shape of the pending image, which is usually represented by a triangle, is changed to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the retained image is a rectangle and highest when it is a star.

Also, when a pending image is displayed as a big-hit look-ahead effect form, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, is changed in color such as "blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow". can express the change in the expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest if the pending image is blue and highest if the pending image is a rainbow.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the case where the pending image is displayed as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit, the pending image is set to, for example, the expected value for the big hit It may be represented by both a color indicating a level and a shape indicating an expected value level for a time-saving hit, or may be represented by a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form.

The reserved image in which the anticipation effect is performed can change from the effect form with the relatively low expected value to the effect form with the relatively high expected value, but the expected value is relatively high from the effect form with the relatively high expected value It is preferable not to change to a low production mode. Also, when changing the presentation form of the hold image, it is not necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow". , for example, "pentagon→circle" or "yellow→rainbow". Also, the shape of the pending image does not necessarily have to start from the lowest expected value, such as a square or blue, but may be, for example, a circle or red.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (response to reservation) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, as in FIG.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. ~ "5" indicates the height of the expected value for the hit (time saving hit, jackpot). For example, the above "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". "Hexagon" and "green" above correspond to "3", "circle" and "red" above correspond to "4", and "star" and "rainbow" above correspond to "5". Equivalent to

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (holding correspondence) of FIG. to "5" are referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

The look-ahead expected value effect pattern when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" is shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of hit) in FIG. 57, for example, It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number 2 for sub effect selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is, as shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub effect selection. The sub effect selection random number value 2 is a random number value extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a variation pattern command for a special symbol is received. In FIGS. 57 and 58, only the case where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" is illustrated, and the illustration when the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for the sake of convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "43H". . When the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be, for example, "43H", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, and the expected value level is "2" when shifting from the third reservation area to the second reservation area. to "3", and when shifting from the second reservation area to the first reservation area, the expected value level changes from "3" to "5".

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the number of reservations is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH". be done. For example, when the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined to be "3FH", the expected value level is "2" in the third reservation area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reservation area, and the second reservation area to the first reservation The expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting to the region.

In this way, the sub CPU 301, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of loss) (see FIG. 58) ), and based on the number of reservations and the sub-effect selection random number value 2, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern is determined.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value production pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate is.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "losing", the selection rate of the look-ahead expected value production pattern (for example, "01H", "0BH", etc.) with a relatively low expected value level is increased. However, it is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as even distribution.

Further, in FIGS. 57 and 58, the sub effect selection random number value 2 having a predetermined width is assigned to all the "prefetch expected value effect patterns", but this is not restrictive, and a specific "prefetch expected value effect pattern" is assigned. ” (that is, the distribution rate of the specific “forecasting expected value effect pattern” may be set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Look-ahead production pattern decision processing]
Next, the look-ahead effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing a prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As shown in FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The sub CPU 301 first determines whether or not it has received a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (NO determination in S3001), the sub CPU 301 terminates the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (YES in S3001), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the prefetch target suspension is not at the current time, that is, whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed for the current suspension. When there are a plurality of suspensions, the look-ahead effect may be performed on a plurality of suspended images, but in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one suspended image.

If the prefetch effect is being executed for the current hold (NO determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the prefetch effect is not being executed for the current hold (YES determination in S3002), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the variation pattern information received by the winning command is for prefetching (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received by the winning command is not for prefetching (NO determination in S3003), the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetching effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the difference between the ceiling price and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number (for example, 4 or 8) that can be held. This processing is for avoiding the transition to the B time-saving game state before execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the suspension of the read-ahead performance despite the execution of the read-ahead performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether or not the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be reserved, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern information received by the winning command is When it is a prefetch target (when S3003 is YES determination), it may be determined whether or not it is larger than the pending number including the prefetch target. The ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information from the main CPU 201 as commands, or may be managed by the sub CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201 .

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table number is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination process. In this process, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) is referred to, and the look-ahead hit type effect pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time saving win" or a "big win". In this process, the result of the special pattern hit determination process is determined based on the variation pattern information received in the prize winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a YES determination is made. be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by transmitting special symbol winning/losing information from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301, it is possible to determine a "time-saving win" or a "big win".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "big hit" (YES determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither "time saving hit" nor "big hit" (NO determination in S3007), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value production pattern (at the time of winning) determination processing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of winning) of FIG. 57 is referenced to determine the look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of winning). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch effect pattern determination processing when losing. In this process, the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (when lost) of FIG. 58 is referenced to determine a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (when lost). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 completes the look-ahead effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effect by performing look-ahead effect, example of expansion of look-ahead effect]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, the expected value of the hit (big hit, time-saving hit) is not only interesting, such as whether it changes to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving look-ahead effect form due to the change in the form of the pending image. It is possible to change the level, and it is possible to enhance the interest by performing a new production that has never existed before. In addition, the timing of changing the form of the pending image is not limited to when the pending is shifted, and may be, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

Also, the form of the pending image performed as a prefetch effect (for example, the form of the pending image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserving area (4) to the first sub-reserving area (1)) is the first start port 120 It may be determined at the time of winning a prize, and the form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbols of the variation may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

By the way, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) in which the prefetching effect is executed in the prefetching time short hit effect pattern, and the variation in which the prefetching effect is executed in the prefetching big hit effect pattern Comparing the probabilities determined by the patterns (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the probability of the former is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). That is, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is higher in the read-ahead short hit effect pattern than the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead big hit effect pattern. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko game machine in which the look-ahead performance is performed only when there is a possibility of a big win, the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance can be increased while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of winning, and the interest is enhanced. can be increased.

In addition, the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big hit performance pattern may be higher than the execution ratio of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead short hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the game state (in this embodiment, normal game state, low probability time-saving game state) in which the probability variation flag is off, it is possible to win "time-saving hit" in the special symbol hit determination process (Fig. 10 reference). However, in this embodiment, although the look-ahead effect is performed in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not performed in the low-probability short-time game state. Even if the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol in the low probability time saving game state is "time saving hit", when the C time saving game state is superimposed on the A time saving game state, and for the A time saving game state In any case where the C time saving game state is not repeatedly executed, the possibility of increasing the time saving number of times is low. Therefore, by minimizing the player's knowledge of the possibility of winning the "time saving win" in the A time saving game state, the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time saving win" is reduced. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-probability short-time game state, and the look-ahead effect is performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability short-time game state and high-probability low-time short game state. may Also, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the look-ahead effect is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, time-saving hit system reach, big hit system reach, or common reach can be executed. In this embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect with the prefetch time saving effect pattern, the time saving hit system reach is executed as the sub variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot reach. In addition, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big-hit performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the big-hit type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-type ready-to-win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time saving effect pattern or the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, it is possible to execute the time saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern. However, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the time-saving hit system reach as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern when the pre-read effect is executed in the pre-read big hit effect pattern.

In addition, the prefetch big hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56) and the prefetch short time hit effect pattern (for example, the prefetch per type effect pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56) ”) or the prefetching common winning effect pattern (for example, the prefetching effect pattern (SAS effect pattern) “27H” shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub CPU 301 performs the sub-fluctuation effect pattern As a common reach (for example, the sub-fluctuation pattern "0AH", "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) may be executed.

Moreover, after executing the time-saving winning system reach and clearly showing the loss in the time-saving winning system reach, a performance pattern may be provided in which the big winning system is executed. In this case, since the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end whether or not the jackpot-type ready-to-win with a high profit rate will be executed, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, when the common reach E is executed in the variable display of the special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for the start information in which the look-ahead effect is executed, the common reach E and the common reach C After the common performance is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the jackpot type ready-to-win C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, the game does not shift to the jackpot type reach C. Similarly, when the common reach E is executed in the target variation, after the performance common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to shift to the performance common to the short-time winning system reach C. On the other hand, when the performance common to the common reach C is not executed at all, it does not shift to the time saving hit system reach C.

By the way, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "big hit look-ahead effect") indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big hit, has already been executed, the sub CPU 301 Do not execute look-ahead effects. Even in a pachinko game machine in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a plurality of reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead effect when a big hit look-ahead effect has already been performed.

For example, any one hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") in which variable display of special symbols is started after this first hold ), and when the prefetching jackpot production pattern (for example, the prefetching hit type production pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is executed in the first reservation, the prefetching production is performed in the second reservation Even if executed, the look-ahead effect in this second hold may not make sense. In particular, when the jackpot is derived for the first hold and is controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state is terminated, the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state, for example, the "time-saving win" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, when the big win look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to carry out the look-ahead performance for the suspension to be executed after the suspension in which the big win look-ahead performance is executed.

Even if the first suspension is the suspension of the big win (the suspension from which the big win is derived), if the look-ahead performance is not executed for the first suspension, the look-ahead performance is executed in the second suspension. may or may not be executed.

In addition, even when a fake big hit look-ahead effect (for example, a look-ahead winning type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if the time-saving hit look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead hit type effect pattern “05H” in FIG. 56) is executed in the first suspension, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time-saving look-ahead effect is executed in the second suspension. may This is because, even if a time-saving win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, in the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine that includes a small win in the result of the special symbol win determination process, a small win is included in the first reservation. Even when the hit look-ahead effect is being executed, the big win look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a big win with a higher degree of profit than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is executed in the first reservation, the big hit look-ahead effect or the time saving look-ahead effect may be performed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, the player can expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when the start information is suspended by winning the first start opening 120 during the execution of the jackpot-type ready-to-win as the sub-fluctuation effect pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead effect for this suspension.

Also, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as “specific suspension” in the paragraph), and whether the look-ahead effect is executed or not performed for this specific suspension, the sub CPU 301 will be executed after the jackpot game state ends. , If it is not in the normal game state, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if it is a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead effect in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state, a low-probability short-time game state), it is specified when the jackpot display mode is derived. When there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute the look-ahead effect for the specific hold after the end of the big win game state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the big hit display mode is derived, the start information determined to be "time saving hit" by the prefetch determination performed by the main CPU 201 is withheld (this This suspension is referred to as "specific suspension" in the paragraph), even if this specific suspension is suspension of "time reduction hit", the main CPU 201 will play a C time reduction game based on "time reduction hit" after the jackpot gaming state ends. It may not be controlled by the state. For example, when the time-saving gaming state overlaps, it is a specification that does not execute multiple time-saving gaming states, and if it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specific hold is "time-saving hit ”, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving game state based on the “time-saving win”.

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead effect]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. FIG. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 can execute a look-ahead effect using a pending image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201 .

[1-10-1. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching jackpot effect pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead effect pattern includes the look-ahead hit type effect pattern and the look-ahead expected value effect pattern. Here, first, as the above-mentioned look-ahead hit type effect pattern, a specific example in which a look-ahead effect is performed in a look-ahead big hit effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing the possibility of a big win. It is a figure which shows a process. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H" or "78H" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f), a first reservation area 411 to a fourth reservation area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. FIG. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas indicating whether reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. be. Also, the 0th area 410 is an area corresponding to the first sub-holding area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 designates the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub reservation area in which the reservation information is stored as indicated by triangles. A reserved image (hereinafter simply referred to as a “held image”) is displayed. Further, when the reservation information is not stored in the first sub reservation area, the sub CPU 301 displays only the frame of the reservation area without displaying the reservation image.

In FIG. 60(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving areas (1) to (3) and no pending information is stored in the first sub-reserving area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that the reservation information is newly stored in the first sub-reservation area (4) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color) of the reserved images shown in the first to fourth reserved areas 411 to 414 differently according to the expected value for the big hit. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white. The color of the pending image displayed is blue (expected level "1").

FIG. 60(c) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), and the color of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , a change from blue to yellow (expected value level “2”) when shifted to the third reservation area 413 .

FIG. 60(d) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(c), and the color of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from yellow to green (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which one hold is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , a change from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 60(f) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. , is an image showing a change from red to rainbow (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the pending image indicating the expected value for the big hit does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, for example, it may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change. .

In addition, in FIG. 60, the change in the expected value from which the big win is derived is shown by changing the big hit look-ahead effect form, but instead of or in addition to this, the big win determination look-ahead from the big hit look-ahead effect form is shown. The sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect that changes to the effect mode. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-2. Specific example when prefetching production is performed in the prefetching time saving production pattern]
Next, a specific example in which a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time saving performance pattern as the look-ahead hit type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61 .

Figure 61 (a) ~ Figure 61 (f) is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, showing that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit system It is a figure which shows the process which changes. Incidentally, the look-ahead time saving type effect pattern shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) corresponds to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH" or "6AH" in FIG. Also, the look-ahead expected value effect patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value effect patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 display a normal reservation image in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, and the fourth reservation area 414 displays a reservation image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), the reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). Sub CPU301, as described above, displays the form (for example, shape) of the pending image shown in the first to fourth pending areas 411 to 414 differently depending on the expected value for the time saving hit.

Thus, in this embodiment, the expected value for the big win is represented by the color of the pending image, and the expected value for the time saving win is represented by the shape of the pending image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first to third reserved areas 411 to 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape shown in the fourth reserved area 414 The shape of the retained image that is displayed is a rectangle (expectation value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold area 414 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413. FIG.

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when shifted to the second reservation area 412. FIG.

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411. FIG.

FIG. 61(f) is an image obtained by shifting one hold from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the hold image displayed in the first hold area 411 in FIG. , is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level “5”) when shifted to the 0th region 410. FIG.

It should be noted that the shape of the hold image that indicates the expected value for the time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star", for example, change to "pentagon → circle" You may let

In addition, the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for the time saving per (expected value level) does not necessarily need to be changed when the hold shifts, for example, even if it is changed during the variable display of the special pattern of the fluctuation good.

In addition, in FIG. 61, by changing the look-ahead effect form of the time-saving hit system, the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived is shown. It may be executed by the sub CPU 301 . In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form.
・ A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmation look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a time-saving hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win fixed look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-3. Specific example when prefetching effect is performed with prefetching common hit effect pattern]
Next, a specific example in which the prefetching effect is performed in the prefetching common winning effect pattern as the above prefetching winning effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 62 .

FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of the look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are common hits indicating that there is a possibility of both a big hit and a time-saving hit. It is a figure which shows the process which a pending|holding image changes from a system look-ahead production form to a big-hit system look-ahead production form. Changes in the common winning system look-ahead production form include changes in the expected value level of the win (shorter time win, big win) and changes in which it is clear whether the type of win is a big win or a short time win. is included. 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to "43H" in FIG.

In this embodiment, both the color indicating the expected value level for the big hit and the shape indicating the expected value level for the time saving hit are used as a common hit system look-ahead effect form indicating that there is a possibility for both the big hit and the time saving hit. is displayed.

In FIG. 62 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the fourth reservation area 414 The reserved image is not displayed and only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 62(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub CPU 301 displays the form (for example, color and shape) of the reserved image shown in the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the hit (big hit or time saving hit). . In this embodiment, if the look-ahead effect is not executed or if the expected value for winning is the lowest, the pending image is displayed as a white triangle, and "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow The expected value for short hits increases in the order of “stars”.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the third reserved area The form of the pending image shown at 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b), and the form of the hold image displayed in the third hold area 413 in FIG. , a change from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level “3”) when shifted to the second reservation area 412 .

FIG. 62(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , When shifted to the first reservation area 411, from the green hexagon (common hit-type look-ahead production form of expected value level "3") to the rainbow triangle (big hit-type look-ahead production form of expected value level "5") It is an image showing that it changed to

That is, the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(b) and FIG. 62(c) is a form showing an expected value for the big hit or a form showing the expected value for the time saving hit. It is a production that is difficult to grasp from the form of. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the form of the pending image indicates the expected value for the big hit, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, the expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

Thus, in this embodiment, according to the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol, the look-ahead performance is divided into a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit and a look-ahead big hit performance pattern indicating the expected value for the big hit. , and a look-ahead common hit effect pattern indicating an expected value for a hit (big hit or time saving hit). Then, when the read-ahead performance is executed in the read-ahead common win performance pattern, the player is given the interest of whether the pending image changes to the big win system look-ahead performance form or the time-saving winning system look-ahead performance form. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the form of the pending image showing the expected value for time saving does not necessarily have to be changed one by one in the order of “blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star” Instead, for example, it may be changed to "yellow pentagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → red triangle (big hit system look-ahead production form)", or "green hexagon (common hit system look-ahead production form) → It may be changed to "triangular star (time-saving hit system look-ahead production form)". Also, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for a win does not necessarily have to start from the blue square with the lowest expected value, but may start from, for example, a red circle.

Also, the form of the hold image indicating the expected value for the win does not necessarily have to be changed when the hold shifts, and may be changed during the variable display of the special symbol of the change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 62, by changing the common winning system look-ahead performance mode, the expected value for deriving any winning (big win or short-time winning) is changed, or the expected win is changed from an unknown state to a big win. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, the sub CPU 301 may execute a look-ahead effect shown below. In this case, the expected value level may also be changed before changing to the big hit determination look-ahead effect form.
- A look-ahead effect that changes from a common hit-type look-ahead effect form to a big hit confirmed look-ahead effect form.
A look-ahead effect that changes from a common win-type look-ahead effect form to a big win-type look-ahead effect form, and then changes to a big-win determination look-ahead effect form.

[1-10-4. Modified example of common hit system look-ahead production form]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common hit system look-ahead production form that indicates that there is a possibility for both the jackpot and the time saving hit is not necessarily the color that indicates the expected value for the jackpot and the shape that indicates the expected value for the time saving hit. and is not limited to the form represented by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit-based look-ahead effect form may be provided. When a dedicated common hit system look-ahead performance form is provided, it becomes possible to have expectations for both big wins and short-time wins, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it will be possible to adapt to future changes in the performance mode. The game can be played with anticipation, and interest can be improved.

FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d) show an example of a prefetch effect pattern displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show a pending image from a dedicated common win system prefetch effect form to a big win system prefetch effect form. It is a figure which shows the process which changes. 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H" or "71H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 63(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

Also, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of the prefetch effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and from the exclusive common winning system prefetch effect form to the time saving system prefetch effect form FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a process in which a held image changes to . 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H" or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to "31H" in FIG. 57 or FIG.

In Figure 63 (a) and Figure 64 (a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412, the normal reservation image is displayed in which the look-ahead effect is not executed, the third reservation area 413 and the second reservation area 413 No reserved image is displayed in the 4 reserved area 414, and only a frame is displayed.

In FIG. 63(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a pending image is newly displayed in the third pending area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both FIG. 63(b) and FIG. 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form, for example, a glittering form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

FIG. 63(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. It is an image showing that the look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

Similarly, FIG. 64(c) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(b), and in FIG. It is an image showing that the common hit system look-ahead effect form is shifted to the second reservation area 412 as it is.

FIG. 63(d) is an image in which the hold is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the hold image displayed in the second hold area 412 in FIG. , when shifted to the first reservation area 411, the image shows a change from the dedicated common hit system look-ahead effect form to a red triangle (big hit expected value level "4").

On the other hand, FIG. 64(d) is an image in which the suspension is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 64(c), and in FIG. When the form is shifted to the first reservation area 411, it is an image showing that it has changed from the dedicated common winning system look-ahead production form to a white circle (expected value level "4" for time saving).

In this way, even when the look-ahead performance form is represented by the dedicated common win-type look-ahead performance form, the special common win-type look-ahead performance form is changed to the big win-type look-ahead performance form and the time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form. It is possible to make the player have interest in which way it will change, and to increase interest.

[1-11. Signals output outside the machine]
Next, it is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko machine (for example, hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), island computer (not shown) provided on each island). Signals are explained. In addition, although the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described in this embodiment, it may be possible to input the signal from the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8 ”, “prize information 2” and “security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals. It may be configured such that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 65 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, CN1 outputs a "prize ball information 1" signal, CH2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal, and CH3 to CH10 output "external information 1" to Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The conditions for outputting signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of "prize ball information 1" out of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, a payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the big winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 winning balls are paid out, and the starting opening (first starting opening 120 or second For example, three prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the starting port 140 (see FIG. 4), and four balls enter the general winning port 122 (see FIG. 4). prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for 120 msec, for example, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the "prize ball information 1" signal for, for example, 120 msec at the timing when the tenth prize ball payout detection switch is turned on starting from the previous output of the "prize ball information 1" signal. Information 1” signal is output. It should be noted that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal at the timing when the payout detection switch for the tenth prize ball is turned on is merely an example. Any period from when it is turned on to when it is turned off is sufficient. In addition, outputting the signal of "prize ball information 1" every time 10 prize balls are paid out or outputting it for 120 msec is just an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "prize ball information 1" can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of the "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine, will be described. A "security" signal is a signal output mainly when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of the errors in the first pachinko game machine. FIG. 67 is a table showing release triggers in , output times of "security" signals (illustrated as "security signals" in FIG. 67), and remarks;

Although the first pachinko game machine does not have a large winning opening for small winning, FIG. 67 also shows a large winning opening abnormal winning error for small winning for the sake of convenience. In addition, in FIG. 67, the big winning opening 131 is described as a big winning opening.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, errors not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. You may do so. Errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or longer, a large winning opening (for big wins) If there is a game ball that has not been ejected from the inside of the winning hole or the big winning hole for small wins, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, there will be an error when the big winning hole enters and is ejected, and the vibration sensor has been on for a predetermined time. Vibration sensor error, etc., when on for a long period of time. Also, for example, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening for big hit, and based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the big winning game control, the probability variable control is executed after the big winning game control is finished. , it will be judged as an error even if there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening for the big win, but the game ball passes through the specific area. preferably configured.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection information executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 for both) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where an abnormal winning error occurs in the big winning opening for big winning.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning prize is detected before the first big winning big winning opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) It is determined that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred, and a "security" signal is output for 12 seconds. In addition, it transmits to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, since the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the error, an external device (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6) ) and the island computer (not shown)) can recognize the occurrence of an error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot ascertain the content of the error. However, without being limited to this, for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, etc., the device outside the aircraft that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. good too.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, a big winning opening abnormal winning error for a big win, for example, it executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control described below is terminated.
Information control for displaying characters such as "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see FIG. 6, for example) via the display control circuit 304;
- Notification control for outputting a voice such as "It is a special winning opening abnormal winning error" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
• Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep sound from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305 .
Information control for causing the LED group 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) through the LED control circuit 306 to light up in red, for example.

Note that if there is a power failure before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the sub CPU 301 terminates the above-described notification control.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal jackpot winning error during execution of the above-described notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-described Re-execute notification control.

Next, the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of signals output to the outside according to the game state in the first pachinko game machine. In FIG. 68, signals to be output are indicated by ◯, and signals not to be output are indicated by x.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, different signals are output depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201 . For example, during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability variation / time reduction), neither signal is output, ” and “external information 7” signals are output, and the signals of “external information 3”, “external information 5” and “external information 7” are output during the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot and during the small hit) output. In addition, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, signals of “external information 3” and “external information 6” are output during a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state (other than during a big hit, other than during a small hit) be done.

In this way, by varying the signal output according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state other than). Similarly, the signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the low-probability short-time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the low-probability short-time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), The signal that is output during the small hit game control process (during the high probability short time game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high probability short time game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and the small hit game The signal output during the control process (during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small winning game control process in the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to ascertain whether or not However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small-win game control process different from the signal output when the small-win game control process is not being performed, the small-win game machine that is the source of the external information can win a small win. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by an external device capable of receiving a signal.

In addition, during the low-probability short-time gaming state shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small winning game control process (during the high-probability time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control are being executed, and only the electric sapo control is executed among the electric sapo control and the special figure shortening control It may be said that the time saving control is being executed when there is, and it may be said that the time saving control is being executed when only the special figure shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control.

In addition, in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine described above, it is possible to control the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state by the control of the main CPU (function of the A time-saving game state, B The function of the time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state are installed), but it is not limited to this. For example, only one of the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function (for example, the function of the A time-saving game state) is installed, and the other function ( For example, it may be a pachinko game machine that does not include the function of the B time saving game state and the function of the C time saving game state). Also, among the functions of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state function, and the C time-saving game state function, two functions (for example, the A time-saving game state function, and the B time-saving game state function or C time-saving It may be a pachinko game machine that has only the function of the game state) and does not have other functions (for example, the function of the B time-saving game state or the function of the C time-saving game state).

In addition, for example, like a pachinko machine called ST machine, in a pachinko machine in which the probability variation flag is set to ON with a probability of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, the function of the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the function of the C time-saving game state may be configured so as not to be installed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be explained. The second pachinko machine is, as described above, a type 1 pachinko machine called digipachi. However, the second pachinko machine differs from the first pachinko machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the outside of the second pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island). The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

Also, in explaining the second pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration explained with reference to the drawings used in the explanation of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, in the explanation of the second pachinko game machine, even if the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings is the same as the first pachinko game machine in terms of functions, etc., the first pachinko game Description will be made using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the machine.

By the way, as a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example Including a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as "priority variation machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first and second starting openings. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "sequential variation machine") in which the starting condition is satisfied in the order of winning.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010 .

Various members arranged in the game area 1105 of the second pachinko machine (for example, the first start port 1120, etc.) are arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko machine (see FIG. 4). There are some things in common, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110, and a guide rail 1110 are provided. A center accessory 1115, a first starting port 1120, a general prize winning port 1122, a passage gate unit 1125, a special electric accessory unit 1130, a second starting port 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric role. It has an object unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 1010. - 特許庁Incidentally, the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this second pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007 . In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) or the like is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward toward the game area 1105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only a portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member (for example, wooden) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of arcuate outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals). The game area 1105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 1110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105 .

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to fit into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and has an arcuate center rail 1116 on the top. The game balls shot toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 1105 by the shooting device 1006 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 1106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 1107 .

Further, the center accessory 1115 is formed with a warp entrance 1117 at its left outer peripheral edge portion into which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115 . The stage 1118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007 . Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 1120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting port 1120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 1122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball enters the general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right area 1107, and includes a passing gate 1126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. 1127 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later).

When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126 is detected by the passage gate switch 1127, the start information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal design is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces). . The reserved starting information of the normal symbol is usually subjected to the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passage gate switch 1127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 1126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 1125 may be located in the left region 1106 instead of or in addition to the right region 1107 .

Also, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (for example, a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating the jackpot. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the character product continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), the accessory continuous operation device is activated. You may make it operate|move and it may be made to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a big win big winning hole 1131 and a big winning big winning hole count switch 1132 (see later-described FIG. 70) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the big winning big winning hole 1131. , and the special electric accessory 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right area 1107 .

The big winning opening 1131 for big hits is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the big winning big winning opening 1131, a big winning big winning opening that can win a left-handed game ball, or a center accessory 1115 A big winning opening for winning a game ball may be arranged in the upper part of the .

In addition, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled in a big winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. This is the winning entrance. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 1131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later), ten winning balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize winning opening 1131 for big win is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134 . The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the shutter 1134 for special electric, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and to enter (pass through) a game ball to the big winning opening 1131 for a big hit. ) is configured to allow state transitions to and from impossible or difficult closing states. It should be noted that the state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time over a plurality of rounds. It is in play state.

(Second start port)
In this embodiment, as the second start opening, a second start opening 1140A and a second start opening 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105, and these second start openings 1140A and 1140B are both right-handed. A game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later). Even if the game ball wins in any of the second start ports 1140A and 1140B, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is detected by the second starting port switches 1141A and 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The received starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four at maximum). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second start ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in the present embodiment, on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit to the right but does not win the big winning opening 1131, there are two flow paths 1107a and 1107b vertically as the flow path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without winning the big winning hole 1131 for a big hit is moved to an upper flow path 1107a or a lower flow path 1107b by a branch peg 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. distributed.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure so that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a win the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a may be configured to be able to win. In addition, game balls that have flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but have not won the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the out port 1178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting port 1140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win prizes.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is disposed on the lower flow path 1107b side, and includes a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body in which a switch for detecting winning of a game ball and a normal electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential to use the above winning opening as the second starting opening 1140B. For example, the first starting opening may be used as the above winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for ordinary electricity 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) for operating the shutter 1147 for ordinary electricity. The normal electric accessory 1146, that is, the normal electric shutter 1147 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 1140B or is easily opened, and a game ball cannot enter the second start port 1140B. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. Instead of the general electric shutter 1147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric tulip made of, for example, a blade member may be employed. Moreover, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a vane type, a door type, a projecting plate type, and the like.

(small hit unit)
The small-hit unit 1150 includes a small-hit large winning opening 1151 and a small-hitting large winning opening count switch 1152 for detecting the winning (passage) of the game ball to the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). , a small-hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward, and a small-hit solenoid 1154 that can operate the small-hit shutter 1153 are integrated.

The small-hit shutter 1153 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction to enable or facilitate the entry (passage) of the game ball to the small-hit large winning opening 1151, and the game to the small-hitting large winning opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to win a prize.

When the game ball wins when the small-hit big winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small-hitting big winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch 1152 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 1151 for small winning is not limited to ten.

Also, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory unit 1145 in the downward flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning big winning port 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the big winning opening 1151 for winning, it is difficult (or impossible) to win the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning because the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side is won.

In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 1131 for big winning and the big winning opening 1151 for small winning are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. The big winning opening opened during execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning opening.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is any of various winning ports (eg, first starting port 1120, second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, big winning port 1131, general winning port 1122, etc.) that are shot toward the game area 1105. This is for ejecting game balls that did not win any prizes to the outside of the machine. This out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 1122, between the normal electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. A game ball flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged outside the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit is provided with a performance accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one or more of the performance accessory group 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 for controlling the effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout/fire circuit. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450 .

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on, processes related to game operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It has a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected with a main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like. The main CPU 1201 incorporates a WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko game machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 1202 .

The main RAM 1203 is provided with storage areas for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing various flags and variable values. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 1206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 1300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200 . For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display portion 1161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 1162, a first special symbol display portion 1163, a second special symbol display portion 1164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 1165, a 2 Special symbol reservation display unit 1166, probability variation notification display unit 1167, time reduction notification display unit 1168, general electric solenoid 1148, special electric solenoid 1135, and small winning solenoid 1154 etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 1170, an error notification monitor 1172, and the like. Main control circuitry 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 also displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later. It is also possible to display a setting-confirming code or the like indicating . As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starter switch 1121, second starter switches 1141A and 1141B, a pass gate switch 1127, a big win count switch 1132 for big wins, a general winswitch 1123 and a big win for small wins. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205 .

Further, the main control circuit 1200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 1184, a setting key 1174 operated to change or confirm setting values in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, which will be described later, backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored by the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing setting values, which will be described later.

Also, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game center to expose the back surface, the manager of the game center operates the setting key 1174 and/or the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 1176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 .

[2-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a character control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 1200 . Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302 . In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls game effects according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

A work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

A display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007 . The display control circuit 1304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 1032 . The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound output from the speaker 1032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 1032 .

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 1058). The role product control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role product, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role product data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/shooting control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/shooting control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls and causing game balls to be shot. A launching device 1006 capable of controlling ball lending, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 1200, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180 . The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of a ball lending card storing cash data (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180 . The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180 . Although the operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 1400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) when the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise. (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450 . The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function is omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, the normal game state in which neither the variable probability control nor the time reduction control is executed, the high probability time-saving game state in which both the variable probability control and the time reduction control are executed, and the time reduction control although the variable probability control is executed A high-probability short-time gaming state that is not executed, and a low-probability short-time gaming state in which variable-probability control is not executed but time-saving control is executed are prepared. It is possible to proceed with However, the game state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state progresses. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game progresses in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state, and the game does not progress in the high-probability non-short-time game state. good.

In the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the high-probability short-time game state, the high-probability non-short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a regular game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 71 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referred to in the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78 to be described later), that is, the game ball wins in the first start port 1120 or the second start ports 1140A, 1140B. It is a table referred to when "time-saving win", "minor win", "big win" or "losing" is decided by lottery based on the big win determination random number extracted at the time. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the winning determination process for the first special symbol are "time-saving win", "big win", and "lose", and "minor win" is not included in the lottery targets. On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are "time-saving win", "minor win", "big hit", and "losing". However, a "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the big hit determination random number value is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the random number for judging a big hit is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving win", "big win", or "lose" in the first special symbol win determination process based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the first special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag, the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this data, the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the range of the jackpot judgment random number value determined as a "losing" The relationship between (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

Also, in the second special symbol win determination process, the main CPU 1201 determines a “time saving win”, “minor win”, “big win” or “lose” based on the extracted big win determination random number value. In the hit determination table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit determined as "time saving hit" and the time saving hit decision value corresponding to this for each probability variation flag value (0 or 1) relationship with the data, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the relationship with the corresponding judgment value data for judging a big hit, the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "big hit" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number value determined as "losing" and the corresponding loss determination value data are stipulated. be.

In this embodiment, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 ”, and the hit-loss determination value data is determined as “time saving hit determination value data”. In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and hits and drops. The determination value data is determined as "big hit determination value data". Also, if the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 judges that it is "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Also, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "big hit" and determines. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Also, if the extracted random number value for judging a big hit is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 judges it as "losing" and determines the judgment value data as "losing judgment value data".

Similarly, for example, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines "time saving hit". It judges and decides judgment value data as "time reduction per judgment value data". Also, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is off at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines "losing" and determines The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Also, for example, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time saving hit". Then, the determination value data is determined as "time reduction hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted big hit determination random number value is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The determination value data is determined as "small hit determination value data". In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON at the time of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON during the hit determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is "losing", and determines The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Thus, in this embodiment, for example, among the random numbers for judging the big hit generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined width from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the case of the hit judging process of the second special symbol), It is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding big hit determination value data and loss determination value data. Also, from the predetermined value, the end (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol) is assigned to the loss determination value data. Furthermore, the big-hit determination value data and the loss determination value data are allocated adjacently. By doing so, for example, when the probability variation flag is turned from OFF to ON (or from ON to OFF), the width of the loss determination value data is reduced by the amount that increases (or decreases) the width of the big hit determination value data ( or larger), it is possible to change the big hit probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time saving judgment value data and small hit judgment value data).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of "time saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, and the "time saving hit" winning probability when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed By making the probabilities different from each other, it is possible to provide variations to the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed is compared to the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

However, the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. may In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving game state when winning the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state, when the "time-saving win" is won just before the time-saving game state ends, the time-saving game state is substantially It will be extended, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is "time saving win" regardless of whether the variable probability flag is on or off. . However, when the variable probability flag is off (normal game state, time saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU 1201 controls the time saving game state, but the probability change flag is on. In the case, even if the result of the hit determination process is "time saving hit", it is not controlled to the time saving game state.

[2-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 72 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins in the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140A, 1140B and the above-mentioned win-lose determination value data. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "designated symbol command" that determine the (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described later). The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol specification command" is a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol variable display is stopped. This is the command to specify. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201, for example, outputs the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. Select like That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Also, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 determines the selected symbol. "z7" is selected as the command, and "zA5" is selected as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 issues a selection symbol command "z10" is selected as the symbol designation command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 executes a small hit game control process. In the small-hit game control process, for example, the small-hit shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated, and the winning (passing) of the game ball to the small-hit big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is possible or easily opened. Execution of the control to become the state, the prize balls can be paid out.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99.

In addition, in this embodiment, with reference to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), the hit/lose determination value data is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for judging a big hit and the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol specifying command may be determined together.

Although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of the time saving win, the big win display mode, the small win display mode or the losing display mode based on the result of the special symbol win determination process. Also, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300 .

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table determines the aspect of the winning game state and/or the aspect of the subsequent game state according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (that is, when determining the mode of the game state after that) When executing the hit type determination process of S1036 of FIG. 78). The mode of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 shows the mode of the big winning game state or the mode of the small winning game state. Further, the aspect of the game state after that indicates the aspect of the game state after the end of the winning game state. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the game state after that is the C time saving game state. Aspects are shown.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and to set the number of times of time saving to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z8", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 50 times. to decide. When the selected symbol command is "z2" and "z9", the main CPU 1201 determines to set ON only the time saving flag out of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the time saving number of times to 100 times. to decide. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described time saving win display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, A time saving flag is set on and the determined number of times of time saving is set without controlling to a jackpot game state, and control to a C time saving game state is possible. In addition, since the winning game state is not controlled when the result of the special symbol hitting determination process is "time saving hit", the aspect of the winning game state is not determined. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of this special symbol is performed, the number of times of time saving to be set is the same. . However, it is not limited to this, and the number of time reduction times to be set may be changed according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", according to the selected symbol command determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the time saving number of times to be set are making it different. By doing so, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is "time saving hit", it is possible to give variation to the progress of the game after that, and it is possible to suppress the decline of interest. It becomes possible.

By the way, as described above, when the variable probability flag is ON, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the variable probability flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" as shown in FIG. In this case, although the display mode of the time saving hit indicating that the "time saving win" is won is derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for "shorter working hours" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the hit determination process is "shorter working hours", the display mode of losing is forcibly changed to a special symbol. The information may be led out to display units 1163 and 1164 . Furthermore, when the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving hit decision value data is not assigned to the big hit decision random number value, that is, the winning decision process not including the "time saving hit" in the lottery result may be performed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability flag is ON, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving game state. You may do so.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of openings of the small winning big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) to 1 as the mode of the small winning gaming state. When the result of the special symbol win determination process is "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described small win display mode to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then the determined small win big win. By setting the number of openings of the mouth 1151, it becomes possible to control the small winning game state. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, and is controlled to the small hit game state. Return to the game state just before the game.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the mode of the winning game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot gaming state, Of the flags, it is decided to set only the variable probability flag to ON, and it is determined to set the variable probability number to 10000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and after the jackpot game state ends, can be controlled to the high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state. becomes.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5" and "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 rounds, 4 rounds and 10 rounds, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. to decide. In addition, as a form of the game state after that, in any case, it is decided to set both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and the probability variable number of times and the time saving number of times are both set to 10000 times. . In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable to a highly reliable time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively, as the aspect of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as a mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined to set ON only the time saving flag out of the probability changing flag and the time saving flag. Also, the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be set to 200 times, for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", and determined to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 derives the above-described big win display mode to the first special symbol display portion 1163 or the second special symbol display portion 1164, then controls the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, It becomes controllable in a time-saving game state. The time saving game state controlled here is the A time saving game state. In addition, the mode of time saving control in the high probability time saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving performance") is preferably the same as the time saving performance in the A time saving game state, but it may be different from the time saving performance in A time saving .

Also, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), the main CPU 1201 determines the mode of the winning game state and None of the subsequent game state aspects are set. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" and "z14"), as described above, the mode of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state modes are set, originally, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, the figure 73.

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of FIG. Win/lose determination value data is determined (performs hit/lose determination) based on the random number value for big hit determination, and hit/lose (“time-saving hit”, “small hit”, “big win” or “losing”) is determined. After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. The selection symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing determination value data, and the type of display mode derived to the special symbol display parts 1163 and 1164 (for example, the type of time-saving winning, the type of big winning) is determined. Incidentally, the hit-lose determination and the determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, but are excluded from being performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the final display. not on purpose.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the A time saving game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, the number of time saving in the C time saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the time saving frequency in the A time saving game state is higher than the expected value of the time saving frequency in the C time saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state, it is possible to increase the position of the "big hit". For example, despite winning the "jackpot", it is possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur due to being disadvantageous compared to the case of not winning the "jackpot" (the case of winning the "shorter working hours") becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of time reductions in the A time-saving gaming state higher than the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the expected value of the number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state You may make it higher than an expected value. Thus, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which the ``jackpot'' is not won continues for a long period of time, if the ``shorter working hours'' is won, the game is controlled to a relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. It becomes possible to

[2-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko game machine. It should be noted that the columns of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 are shown for convenience to facilitate understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B. Determine the variation pattern of the design. The special symbol variation pattern table of FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S1037 of FIG. 78 described later.

In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to a special symbol variation pattern table for low start shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in FIG. If so, set the readahead flag. The sub CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, in a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, or a low-probability short-time game state, for example, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set the look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern with reference to the high start special symbol variation pattern table, but the present invention is not limited to this.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the special symbol variation pattern is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hit-or-lose), the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number. determined by However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

Incidentally, the reach determination random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start of FIG. 75, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start of FIG. The expected value of the number of variable display times of special symbols per unit time is greater than when it is determined. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 600000 msec (for example, long variation AC) and variable over a very long period of time. display is performed. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a very short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, super-speed variation). .

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301 . The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201 .

Although not shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, for each set value, for example, the range of random number values for effect selection is changed so that the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol is different. good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74) is referred to determine the special symbol variation pattern, for example, high probability short game state, high probability non In the time-saving gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables having different expected values of variable display times of special symbols per unit time are provided, for example, according to the type of time-saving gaming state, special symbols Different tables may be referred to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIGS. 74 and 75 have the possibility of a time-saving hit as a result of the special symbol hit determination processing (there is no possibility of a big hit). It is a reach production that shows. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control processing will be described below, and description of other processing executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 86), etc. ), hereinafter, the special symbol control processing will be described again, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process of setting the address of the work area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process. .

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 1201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols is kept for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demonstration display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a main special symbol demonstration display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol and the other is used as the sub special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which the left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and the right-handed hitting is the regular game state (for example, a high-accuracy short-time game state , high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbols, display effects such as characters, and voice effects for the main special symbols. For example, when the result of the sub-special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol effect may be performed while performing the main special symbol effect. In addition, among the game states in which the right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-probability short-time game state, instead of the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, which is the main special design, other effects An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of times of time saving until the time saving game state ends) may be displayed.

At S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1001.

When it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not the time to start the variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process to S1003. For example, NO determination is made in S1002 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1002), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

At S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

At S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1005), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 performs the process. to S1006. For example, NO determination is made in S1005 during execution of the big hit game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S1005), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1006, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1007.

At S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

At S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded at S1007.

When it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not reached (NO determination in S1008), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is reached (when S1008 determines YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1009.

At S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1009, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1010.

At S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

At S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded at S1010.

When it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not the time to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process, and shifts the process to the main control main process (Fig. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is reached (YES in S1011), no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

At S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when processing related to the first special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, in the order of priority, special symbol management processing described later is running.

[2-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, special symbol management processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1003, S1006, S1009 and S1012 during the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol management process is called in S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process and executed, the second special symbol is processed, and the special symbol management process is S1006 or S1006 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S1012, the first special symbol is to be processed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

At S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023. It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 performs the processes after S1023 based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

At S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S1023 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S1024 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

At S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The process of S1025 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1026.

At S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The process of S1026 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

At S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs jackpot end processing. The process of S1028 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 when the special symbol management process is called at S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 when the special symbol management process is called at S1006, and calls at S1009. If so, the process returns to S1010, and if called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called at S1023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S1031 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1032.

At S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is determined as YES (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is ON (S1032 is NO determination ), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

When it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on in S1032 (NO determination in S1032), as described above, the special symbol variable display start processing does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 displays the special symbol variable display. End start processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S1032 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1033.

At S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination process is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the first special symbol is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. It is determined whether there is In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time saving flag to ON when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a time saving hit, and turns on the small winning flag when the result of the special symbol winning determination processing is a small win. , and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1035. The time-saving winning flag is turned off when shifting to the C time-saving game state, the small winning flag is turned off when the small winning game state is started, and the big winning flag is turned off when the big winning game state is started.

In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving hit, and if it is determined that it is not a time saving hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss.

At S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, time-saving hit, small hit, big hit, or loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol win determination process is a loss. A stop symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of the winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a winning (a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but the number of types of big winnings may be one, and the type of time-saving winnings may also be one. Furthermore, in place of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or a plurality of types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the reach determination random number or/and the effect selection random number. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value or the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state) where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, a special symbol variation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75 ) to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1038.

At S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the special symbol variation time. be. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1039.

At S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (Fig. 77 S1024) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1040.

At S1040, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1041.

At S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

At S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S1041) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)) by interrupt prohibition. It is preferable to perform it within the interval.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed. In addition, in the special symbol variable display ending process described below, the special symbol to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol not to be processed is referred to as "other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when S1051 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

At S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

At S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded at S1052.

If it is determined that the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on in S1053 (if the determination is NO in S1053), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing ( 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is OFF (when S1053 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

At S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1025 in FIG. 77) can be performed after the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1055.

At S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1056.

At S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. The number-of-determined-symbols counter is a counter for counting the number of times special symbols are determined (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of remaining times of variable probability and the number of remaining times of reduced working hours. You can manage numbers. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1057.

At S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small win.

In S1057, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO in S1057), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1057 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (when S1057 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1058.

At S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start or stop the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1059.

At S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big win.

In S1059, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a big hit (when S1059 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol variable display end process and processes. is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1059 that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit (when S1059 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

At S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible not to start the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

At S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and changes the processing to special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (YES in S1061), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

At S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test-firing test signal is output to the outside. This test-firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a failure. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1064.

At S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the win flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this processing, when the result of the hit determination processing for the special symbol to be processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol hits. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1065.

At S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

At S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting a predetermined fixed waiting time to the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating the loss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

At S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2". After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1068.

At S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

At S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Thus, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78). If the result of (2) is a big hit and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the process of forcibly making the variable display of the other special symbol a failure is performed.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called at S1025 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when S1071 determines NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S1071 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a big win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S1072, when it is determined that the stopped special symbols are not in the stop display mode indicating the big win (NO determination in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073. On the other hand, in S1072, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not there is a small win, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small win.

In S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074.

At S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (when S1073 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a start setting process for the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process. In this processing, signals output to, for example, a hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) and an island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a variable probability flag, a variable probability counter, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning) (S1077), the external terminal board 1184 Big hit signal set processing (S1078), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), game state designation parameter setting processing (S1080), and transmission reservation processing for the big hit start display command (S1081 ), etc. In addition, by performing the process (S1079) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol game determination process ends, the large winning opening preparation process (Fig. 77 S1026) is performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1074 during the special symbol game determination processing (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

At S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

At S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol win determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a loss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the variable probability flag or the time saving flag. Therefore, even if the display mode of losing is derived, the game state does not shift.

[2-4-7. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1026 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening preparation process is called at S1026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO determination in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S1101 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

At S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the big winning game state when the big winning game control process is executed, and when the small winning game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small hit game control process. It should be noted that the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter (large winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 . After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 1131 or the small winning big winning opening 1151) reaches the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of openings of the big-hit jackpot 1131 opened in the big-hit gaming state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of openings of the small-hit large winning opening 1151 opened in the small-hit game state is, for example, one.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S1103 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1104.

At S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S1104) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (Fig. 77 S1028) is performed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1105.

At S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S1106). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the preparation processing for opening the big winning opening, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter value of the number of times the big winning opening has been opened. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1108.

At S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the big winning game control process is executed, and the small winning big winning hole 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. A big winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning big winning opening 1151), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, the winning of the big winning opening The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of openings of the big winning opening corresponds to the number of rounds when the big winning game control process is executed, and corresponds to the opening number of the big winning opening 1151 for small winnings when the small winning game control process is executed. In addition, it is not intended to exclude one round or a small winning game control process in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1110.

In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a maximum of 30000 msec, for example, when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to a maximum of 1800 msec, for example, when executing the small winning game control process. be. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, 10 at maximum when executing the big winning game control process, and is set to 5 at maximum when executing the small winning game control process. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the big winning opening is set to 10 for both the big winning opening 1131 and the big winning opening 1151 for the small winning, for example. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening are not limited to the above.

At S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, processing for generating opening/closing control data for the big winning openings (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1111.

At S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1111) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1112.

At S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

At S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs reservation processing for transmission of the command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the big winning opening opening control process is called at S1027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S1121 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S1121 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning the big winning openings (big winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is the maximum winning number. In this process, a large winning opening winning counter (for example, a big winning opening counting switch 1132 for big winning and a big winning opening counting switch 1152 for small winning (see FIG. 70) etc.) is the value of the maximum winning number. It should be noted that the value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 .

In S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S1122), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (large winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) is the maximum winning number (when S1122 is YES determination) , the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for big winning, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has passed.

When it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) has not elapsed (NO determination in S1123), the main CPU 1201 determines that the winning opening has not occurred. The mouth opening control process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151) has passed (if YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs closing processing of the big winning openings (big winning opening 1131, small winning opening 1151). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1125.

At S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1125) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation is performed again. Processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1126.

At S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 at S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called at S1028 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

When it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO determination in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77). , the process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S1131 determines YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1132.

At S1132, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, the value of various flags (eg, variable probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) is set or reset, and various counters (eg, variable probability counter, time-saving counter, pattern fixed number counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened) counter, big winning opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) is set or reset. Both the special symbol pause flag and the ceiling counter are reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, the ceiling counter is not updated in the high-probability gaming state in which the probability variation flag is on. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1133.

At S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small winning rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high-probability short-time game state, a high-probability non-short-time game state, and a low-probability short-time game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is one of these game states. Control to any game state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode. In addition, in other game states (high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state and low-probability short-time gaming state), since hitting to the right is a regular game mode, the game to the second start port 1140A, 1140B A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting opening, the first The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning big winning opening 1151 is another game state (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a small hit rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, a game ball struck to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126 . In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second start opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the big hit game control process is executed, the big winning opening 1131 for the big hit will not be in the open state, so the frequency that the second start opening 1140B will be in the open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state Therefore, if the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small winning large winning opening 1151.例文帳に追加When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 1151 for a small hit, ten prize balls, for example, are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win the second start port 1140A. When the game ball wins in the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, for example, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71), a stop indicating a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1/3 (approximate) Not only the display mode is derived, but also super-speed fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75). The winning frequency of the game ball to the winning opening 1151 is increased compared with other game states (for example, normal game state, high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small winning rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) paid out per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, the high certainty short working hours gaming state, the low certainty short working hours gaming state), the second start port 1140B is opened by executing the electric sapo control, and is struck to the right and Most of the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b end up winning the second starting port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small-hit large winning opening 1151 is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning the small-hitting large winning opening 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow-down path 1107a enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but at the second start port 1140A, it is hit to the right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the path 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win prizes. Thus, in the gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls) to be paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, but if right-handed hitting is performed, the right-handed game ball passes through the passage gate 1126 and the normal symbol hit is displayed in a stop display mode. When pulled out, the normal electric accessory 1146 operates, and there is a possibility that the small winning big winning opening 1151 is opened by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 1140B. However, in the normal game state, since the special symbol variation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), provisionally, the game ball wins the second start port 1140A, 1140B. Even if it does, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any one of the long variations A to C having extremely long variation times, and the frequency of opening the small winning big winning opening 1151 is extremely small. Therefore, there is no real benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. In addition, when the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first start opening, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state is set to 0, for example, so as not to generate the actual profit of hitting to the right. good too. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time reduction control is executed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be a small hit rush in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to be a small hit rush in a high-probability short-time gaming state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is performed without performing the electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be explained. As described above, the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is A first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "big win" is derived. In the second route, the V-attacker is released by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "a prize released", and the game ball entering the released V-attacker is V This is the case of winning the V winning slot in the attacker.

The third pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and establishes the starting condition of the second special symbol with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variator to However, it is not limited to this, and may be the sequential variation machine described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic configuration such as the outer frame 2 and the base door 3, etc., and the external terminal plate 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine (For example, a hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) or an island computer (not shown) provided on each island), such as signals output to the first pachinko machine The description of the common points will be omitted as much as possible.

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko game machine are used for the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko game machine, the first pachinko machine The description will be made using the reference numerals and step numbers that are different from those of the game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. This game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. On the front side of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which a shot game ball can roll and flow.

In addition, various members (for example, the first start port 2120, etc.) arranged in the game area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine may be common to various members arranged in the game area 105 of the first pachinko game machine. Yes, but let me explain again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which shot game balls can roll and flow down, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially central portion of the game area 2105. center accessory 2115, first starting port 2120, second starting port 2140, general prize winning port 2122, passage gate unit 2125, special electric accessory unit 2130, and ordinary electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Incidentally, the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (no reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007 . A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and a game nail (no reference numeral) is planted. A game ball shot from the shooting device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and is directed downward to the game area 2105 while changing its traveling direction. flow down.

In addition, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged to enhance the performance effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the ornaments provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent member. Also, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent portion, and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of arc-shaped outer rails and inner rails (both without reference numerals) as in the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 2110 . The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball shot from a shooting device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and has an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game balls shot toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116. - 特許庁

A game ball shot toward the game area 2105 by the shooting device 2006 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 . A game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 collides with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100 and flows downward while changing its traveling direction. When the amount of operation of the shooting handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area 2106 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 62 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area 2107 .

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the left outer peripheral edge thereof into which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. A game ball entering the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115 . The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 into which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 2118 substantially in the left-right direction. is configured to Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) through the mouth 2120 .

(First start port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). In addition, the right-handed game ball may be able to win the first starting hole 2120 . Also, in place of or in addition to the above-described first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the start condition is established. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the first start port 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second start port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win the second starting port 2140 .

When the game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. FIG. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The withheld starting information is subjected to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winner)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged in the lower left part of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that left-handed game balls can win (right-handed game balls are difficult or impossible to win). It is When a game ball wins in one of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122 is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, four winning balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize. Or in addition, it may be provided with a general prize winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

(passage gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right region 2107, and includes a passing gate 2126 configured to allow almost right-handed game balls to pass through, and a passing gate switch for detecting passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later). When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal design is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, maximum 4 pieces). The reserved various data are usually subjected to the hit determination process of the design. Even if the passage gate switch 2127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. Also, the pass gate unit 2125 may be located in the left region 2106 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107 .

(Special electric accessories unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball to the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 2125 in the right area 2107 .

The big winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, it is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the large winning hole 2131, a large winning hole in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is arranged, or a game is played on the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large prize winning opening in which a ball can win a prize may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when controlled to a big win game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 2131 is detected by the big winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), ten prize balls, for example, are paid out. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls into the big prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move back and forth, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 to be described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134 . The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 2131, and an open state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be transitionable to and from a closed state. The big winning port 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big win game state is entered through the above-described first route. When the jackpot game state is reached through the above-described first route, state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot 2131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that makes it possible.

(Normal electric accessories unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by winning (passing) of the game balls, a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls to the winning opening, a normal electric It is a unit body integrated with the accessory 2146 and arranged in the right area 2107 . In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140 and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141 .

The normal electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type shutter 2147 for normal electric power that can move back and forth, and a solenoid for normal electric power 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) for operating the shutter 2147 for normal electric power. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the normal electric shutter 2147, is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start port 2140 or is easily opened, and in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 2140. Or configured to allow state transitions to and from difficult closed states. It should be noted that a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed instead of the general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107 . The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the V winning winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and close the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V-attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. Attacker count switch 2153, V winning port 2155 through which game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and game balls entering inside V winning device 2150 from opening and closing winning port 2151 are V A V winning opening switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball has entered (passed through) a winning opening 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning opening 2151 has not entered the V winning opening 2155. A loss port 2157 into which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a V winning. A locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls entered inside the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126 or may be provided in the left area 2106 .

The V-attacker 2152 consists of members along an arc, and is always in a closed state to close the open/close winning opening 2151 . Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and a stop display mode indicating that the later-described "accessory hit" is derived, almost simultaneously with the completion of the variable display of the special symbols, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 ( (see FIG. 88, which will be described later), the V-attacker 2152 operates, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is activated once, the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened for 1800 msec, for example. While the open/close winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

It should be noted that the manner in which the V-attacker 2152 is released when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory hit" is derived is not limited to the above. It may be closed based on a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 .

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 . When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and performs the functions of the main CPU 2201. is added to the value of the V attacker win counter. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V-attacker solenoid 2154 activates the V-attacker 2152 to open or close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) for opening the opening/closing winning port 2151 has not elapsed. Mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 . That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers control to the big hit game state via the above-described second route.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 2155 . When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects that a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V-attacker 2152 has been opened, the main CPU 2201 continues the opening control of the V-attacker 2152 . That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the first route, a round game is executed in which the big winning port 2131 is shifted from the closed state to the open state, whereas the second route is executed. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state through the route, a round game is executed to shift the V attacker 2152 from the closed state to the open state. However, not limited to this, for example, when controlled to the big win game state through the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a large winning opening A round game may be executed to move 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Also, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in an open state), the V winning opening and the big hit game The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball enters the V prize opening 2155 provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. enters, it is controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot game state through the second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 enters (passes through). A game ball that has passed through the loss port 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, when all the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is terminated without being continued. do.

V-shutter 2158 operates a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later) to operate a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through V-winning opening 2155, and a game ball opening to V-winning opening 2155. A constant movement is always performed between the open mode in which the ball can (or easily) pass through. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a cycle of 7000 msec, which repeats the operation of "6000 msec closed→1000 msec open→6000 msec closed".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155 and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 . A game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is ejected out of the machine through the loss port 2157 . Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged out of the machine through the loss port 2157.例文帳に追加

In addition, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V-attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that is unlocked in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, it wins (passes) the V winning opening 2155, and this If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it passes through the losing opening 2157 . In addition, without providing the locking member 2160 , the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 .

(out port)
The out port 2178 is for various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the big winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) of those shot toward the game area 2105. This is for ejecting game balls that have not won or entered any of the machines to the outside of the machine. This out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged out of the machine. However, in addition to the out port 2178 described above, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between a plurality of general prize winning ports 2122, between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, etc. A game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the game panel 2100 . This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and has a performance role group 2058 such as a movable role controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300 . At least one or more of the performance accessory group 2058 or the performance accessory component constituting the performance accessory functions as a performance accessory operable based on the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. electrical configuration]
Next, referring to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Although the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, it will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 for controlling the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 2300 , a payout/fire control circuit 2400 , and a power supply circuit 2450 .

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (readable/writable memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main CPU 2201 is connected with a main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like. The main CPU 2201 incorporates a WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202 .

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 2203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. . In this embodiment, the RAM is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, but the RAM is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

An initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost when power is cut off.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I/O port 2205 connected to enable communication with various devices, etc., and a command output port 2206 connected to enable output of various commands to the sub control circuit 2300. Also prepare.

Various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200 . For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display portion 2161, a normal symbol reservation display portion 2162, a first special symbol display portion 2163, a second special symbol display portion 2164, a first special symbol reservation display portion 2165, a 2 Special symbol holding display unit 2166, time saving display unit 2168, general electric solenoid 2148, special electric solenoid 2135, V attacker solenoid 2154, and V shutter solenoid 2159 etc. are connected. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected with a performance display monitor 2170, an error notification monitor 2172, and the like. Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

Performance display data, set values, and the like are displayed on the performance display monitor 2170 under the control of the main CPU 2201 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating a ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed and a setting confirmation process being performed in the case of, for example, a pachinko game machine with a setting function. It is also possible to display a code during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a pattern that is not usually displayed as a special pattern (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starter switch 2121, a second starter switch 2141, a pass gate switch 2127, a big prize winner count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winner count switch 2156, and a general switch. A winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205 .

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a hall computer 2186 which manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall. External terminal board 2184, setting key 2174 operated when setting values are changed or confirmed in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, and backup data stored in main RAM 2203 can be transferred to the manager of the game hall. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared in accordance with an operation is connected. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. good too.

Also, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming facility cannot easily touch them. The "inside a predetermined case" includes not only those configured so that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 corresponding to the case. A notch is provided, and when the pachinko game machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the person in charge of the game hall to expose the back surface, the person in charge of the game hall presses the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. Also included is one configured so that the clear switch 2176 can be contacted.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this. Such a configuration may be used. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 .

[3-2-2. sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, an audio control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a character control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 2200 . Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected with effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the third pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 2302 . In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls game effects according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

A work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

A display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007 . The display control circuit 2304 includes an image data ROM that stores VDP and data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into image signals. Equipped with a converter, etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer according to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301 . The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. In this manner, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 2032 . The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 2032 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as voices and sound effects output from the speaker 2032 .

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more of the performance role group 2058). The role item control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the role product control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM in response to a role product activation command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine. and a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending are connected.

When receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls. .

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180 . The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a lending/returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180 . The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the ball rental control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180 . The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, the dispensing/firing control circuit 2400 controls the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the clockwise rotation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). (not shown) to control the shooting of game balls.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit that is created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450 . The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, basic specifications of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. The third pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In addition, probability variation control is not performed in the 3rd pachinko game machine. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the regular game mode. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display a hitting method that is regarded as a regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007 .

[3-3-1. Hit Judgment Table for Special Symbols]
FIG. 89 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball wins (passes through) the first starting port 2120, the main CPU 2201 performs the first special symbol hit determination process using the first special symbol jackpot determination random number value. Then, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) through the second starting port 2140, the main CPU 2201 performs the second special symbol hit determination process using the second special symbol jackpot determination random number value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory release hit".

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent the "accessory hit" from being determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined to be the "accessory hit". , It is preferable that the second special symbol is determined only with a very low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") compared to the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential to avoid being determined to be "losing" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but if it is determined to be "losing", "accessory open hit" It may be set to be higher than the probability determined by 1, or may be set to be lower than the probability determined by ``per chance to unlock the role item''.

In the special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202, data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120 include "time saving hit", "big hit ” Or the range (width) of the random number for judging the big hit determined as “losing”, and the judgment value data corresponding to it (“time saving judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “losing judgment value data”) relationship is stipulated. In addition, as the data used for the second special symbol hit determination process executed based on the winning to the second start port 2140, the big hit determined as "time saving hit", "big hit" or "accessory open hit" The range (width) of the random number for judgment and the relationship between the judgment value data corresponding to it ("time reduction hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "accessory open hit judgment value data") are stipulated. there is

This third pachinko game machine does not have a function of changing the probability of a big win determined as a "big win", but this is not essential. It may be set so as to increase the probability of a big hit.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the big hit determination random number value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number value for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535.

If the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of opening the accessory may be set higher at high settings than at low settings. In this case, for example, both the probability of winning a big hit and the probability of winning a role object may be higher at a high setting than at a low setting. The probability may be higher with high setting than with low setting, or the probability of big hit is fixed regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning a role is higher with high setting than with low setting. may However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the time saving winning probability as a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the winning probability of opening the role object according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of continuous time reduction may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning mouth 2155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times of shortening By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled to the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special pattern judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" for determining the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball wins the starting port 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data; This table is referred to when selecting the "symbol designation command". The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big hit when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big hit, and the "symbol specifying command" is a special symbol. This is a command for specifying the pattern to be displayed when the variable display of is stopped. The special symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, for example. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 outputs the selected symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the design designation command.

Further, when the time saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and selects "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the accessory release hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted for the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described for the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the special symbol stop mode derived to the first special symbol display portion 2163 or the second special symbol display portion 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped. It is a table referred to when making a decision according to a design command. Further, in the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164, the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the winning prize or the display mode of losing is derived based on the result of the special symbol win determination processing. be. Also, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300 .

[3-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine. In the hit type determination table, according to the selected symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, the aspect of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the aspect of the subsequent game state (more specifically, It is referred to when determining time saving flag and time saving end condition). The mode of the game state after that indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time saving hit, it is controlled to the C time saving game state without being controlled to the big hit game state. "L" shown in the column of time-saving end conditions in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and "N" indicates the number of times the accessory is released. It should be noted that the remarks column in FIG. 91 is provided for convenience to facilitate understanding.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the mode of the C time saving gaming state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time saving hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big hit game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the number of rounds as a mode of the big win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 and determines not to set the time saving flag to ON. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time saving flag to ON, and sets the time saving end conditions to L=50, M= 5, determine N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state through the second route, the main CPU 2201 , the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the time saving flag is set on, and the time saving end conditions are determined to be L=50, M=5, and N=2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory released", if the big win game state is not controlled through the second route, the main CPU 2201 executes the big win game state. Not only does it not, the time saving flag is not set on, and after executing the control based on the winning of the opening of the role, the game state immediately before the opening of the role is restored.

Further, for example, when the result of the special symbol win determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 determines the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state. Do not set either. That is, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the main CPU 2201 does not shift the game state, and continues control to the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z4"), both the aspect of the jackpot game state and the aspect of the subsequent game state as described above Since it is not set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "losing", for the sake of convenience, in order to clarify that neither the mode of the jackpot game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined. 91.

In addition, "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of time saving end conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this, different conditions may be used. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state, or the A time saving game state and B Only one of the time saving game state and the C time saving game state may be different. Also, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state and the C time saving game state. , A time saving game state, B time saving game state and C time saving game state may be changed only in one of the time saving game state. That is, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" is set to at least one of the A time reduction game state, B time reduction game state, and C time reduction game state. You may make it differ in a game state.

[3-3-4. Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the third pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that the "remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determining fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first start port 2120, and determines the first special symbol when the game ball wins the second start port 2140. 2 Determine the variation pattern of the special design.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving winning", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the first special symbol to the first start port 2120 and the game ball wins. It is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 extracts the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the first starting port 2120. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "losing", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the value of the time saving flag, the game ball entering the first start port 2120 (passing ) is determined based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of ). It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, since hitting to the right is the normal game mode, it is considered that the game ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120 .

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second start port 2140. It is determined based on the extracted random number for effect selection.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 sets the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the effect extracted when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the second start port. A variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball wins at 2140.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "hit the role item open" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as the variation time. is determined to be a very long long-fluctuation performance of, for example, 600000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", basically the game ball does not win (pass) to the second starting port 2140, but if an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 This is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player even if the game ball wins, but this is not always essential.

The random number for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number for effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 2120 is a specific random number. The sub CPU 2301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

For the sake of convenience, it does not appear in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. If the probability variation flag is on, do not set the look-ahead flag.

Also, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may determine.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 may set a look-ahead flag (a look-ahead effect is performed) also when the time saving flag is on or when the variable probability flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a look-ahead flag may be set (a look-ahead effect may be performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of times of variation per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301 . The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201 .

In addition, the time-saving hit system reach A and B shown in the column of "remarks" in FIG. It is a performance. Similarly, the big hit type reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination processing is a possibility of a big hit (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reach A and B are reach effects indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be both a time saving hit and a big hit.

Further, although the description is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, as in the first pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16) and a normal symbol determination table. (See FIG. 17), a normal per symbol type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19) are stored. Then, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the special symbol control process performed at S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. It should be noted that the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (Fig. 42, Fig. 103), etc. ), below, including the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko game machine, step numbers will be changed and explained again.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control processing performed at S39 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the special symbol work area in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing for checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols in executing the special symbol control processing. Then, when both the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are "0" for a certain period of time or longer, the main CPU 2201 performs a demonstration display command transmission reservation process. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demonstration display effect. In addition, since the second pachinko machine is not a pachinko machine capable of variably displaying the first special pattern and the second special pattern in parallel, the concept of the main special pattern as explained in the first pachinko machine There is no

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not it is waiting for variable display of the special symbol.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO in S2002), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when S2002 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is not reserved (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , the processing is returned to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the variable display of the first special symbol is started, that is, the starting information of the first special symbol is withheld (when S2004 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2005. to

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, the starting information of the second special symbol is withheld (when S2003 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process of Move to S2005.

At S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the starting information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variator to be given has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variation machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning to the second starting port 2140 .

[3-4-2. Special pattern management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is YES determination), the special symbol management process is the second special symbol to be processed when S2003 is YES determination, and the first special symbol when S2004 is YES determination. A special design is a processing object. In addition, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is for the special symbol being executed.

Also, the numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). .

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2011), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

At S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2013. It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 performs the processes after S2013 based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

At S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

At S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. The processing of this S2015 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. The process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

At S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening control processing. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the special symbol control state number is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

At S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a preparation process for opening the big winning opening. The processing of this S2018 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 . If the special symbol control state number is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening control process. The processing of this S2019 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of this big winning hole opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 . If the special symbol control state number is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot end processing. The processing of this S2020 is processing performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process is returned to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO determination in S2021), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when S2021 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the special symbol starting information. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a special symbol big hit determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is a processing object, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a loss. Also, if the second special symbol is the object of processing, it is determined which of the time saving hit, the big hit, and the accessory release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2024.

At S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time saving hit, a big hit, a role release hit or a loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referred to, and the above-described "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining the type of winning when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a winning (time-saving winning, big winning, accessor product opening winning). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91) is referred to, and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). It should be noted that the type of hit determined when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is, for example, a prize-opening hit is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the prize-opening hit. It is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and accessory-opening wins. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or prize release wins, a plurality of losing types may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process of judging or determining a variation pattern of special symbols. In this process, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023), the value of the time saving flag, the reach determination random value or / And the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referred to, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

At S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process ends. It will happen. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

At S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 (for example, variable probability remaining number, time saving remaining number, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

At S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, mainly, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

At S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited interval, and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start processing (particularly, game state management processing (S2030) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited interval. It is preferable to use

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is to be processed. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is the process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is to be processed.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S2041), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end processing, and performs the special symbol management processing (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S2041), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

At S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "2". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

At S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

At S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the confirmed symbol number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol confirmation number counter is a counter for counting the number of special symbol confirmations (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, you may manage the number of games of the special symbol game performed under specific conditions, such as the probability variable remaining number and the time-saving remaining number. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is the process called at S2015 during the special symbol management process with the first special symbol as the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process with the second special symbol as the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when S2051 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

At S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a big win has been achieved, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is not a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in the stop display mode indicating a big win (NO determination in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a big win (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating the winning of the accessory, and when the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of the big hit game control processing. In this processing, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In addition, in the big hit game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning hole 2131 (S2055), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), game state designation parameter setting processing (S2058), and transmission reservation processing (S2059) of the big hit start display command. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the end of this special symbol game determination process. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a winning prize, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a winning prize.

In S2060, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not a win, ie, that the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S2060), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol is a winning prize, that is, the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the winning prize (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 advances the processing to S2061. to

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the game control per release of the accessory. In this processing, a signal (for example, a winning signal for winning a prize) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of openings of the V winning device 2150 set in this process is, for example, one. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

At S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting a winning winning prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and processing for setting the game state designation parameter (S2065). ), and transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the per-accessory-per-release start display command. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game end processing is performed, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol game determination processing (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a one-type and two-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy game state, the time-saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is similar to that shown in Fig. 32 in the first pachinko game machine. There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in the first pachinko machine, when the variable probability flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set on. In the pachinko game machine of 3, it is not controlled to a high certainty game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON when the variable probability flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. different in Further, in the first pachinko game machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether the probability variation flag is off (see S191), on the condition that the probability variation flag is off Although the processing of S192 is performed, the third pachinko gaming machine is different in that the processing of S192 is performed without performing the processing of S191 because the high accuracy game state is not controlled as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as the processes described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

At S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "0". Thus, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is finished, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2073.

At S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of V winning device opening preparation processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when S2081 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to perform only one opening for a maximum of 1800 msec, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. , the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec, for example. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns are provided within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total per opening of the role item, and among these multiple release patterns, for example, which one is selected based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol Either one open pattern may be set. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

At S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this process, the process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

At S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "4". In this way, by performing the processing (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the V winning device opening control processing (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation processing ends. will be performed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

At S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when S2091 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 when the open/close winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) for counting the number of winning game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. be. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning prizes (NO determination in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls winning the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2092 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 2151) has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has passed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO determination in S2093), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and changes the process to the special symbol management process. (See FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2093), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

At S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the open/close winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not there is detection by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. It should be noted that the above specified time may be a time related to entry of the game ball into the interior of the V winning device 2150. For example, within a specified time after the V attacker 2152 starts to operate, The above specified time may be within a specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined in S2095 that a V prize has been detected (when S2095 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing of V-per game control. In this processing, a signal (for example, V hit signal, etc.) to be output to hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) through external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. It should be noted that the signal generated and updated in this process is the special symbol hit signal that is the target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 15 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). You can get a lot of prize balls as well. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-hit game control and the big-hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-hit game control can also be called the big-hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V per game control of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. By carrying out this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, activation of the V attacker 2152), which is first executed based on the winning prize, is processed as the first round of the round game. That is, the V-per-game control executed by determining that there was a V winning prize detection (S2095 was determined YES) will be started from the round game of the second round. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs processing for setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of operations of the V attacker 2152) (S2099), and sets the V winning signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100). , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state designation parameter setting process (S2102), and the V hit start display command transmission reservation process (S2103). In addition, by performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process is completed, the large winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. It will happen. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined at S2095 that V winning has not been detected (NO at S2095), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

At S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Grand Prize Opening Preparation Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the big winning opening preparation processing executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2018 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol management processing (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when S2111 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

At S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state. The round counter value (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 . After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

At S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit (when S2113 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

At S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "7". Thus, by performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed. It will happen. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

At S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command (S2116). Incidentally, the jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

At S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big win is derived (S2052 in FIG. 97 is YES). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the jackpot 2131 is selected as the jackpot to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the winning of the opening of the role, and the stop display mode indicating the opening of the role is derived (YES determination in S2060 of FIG. 97), and V winning is detected (Fig. 100 S2095 is determined YES) If it is the V winning game control started by, the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening and closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

At S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the large winning The number of winning balls and the like at the time of winning to the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are set. The number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude the case where the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable that the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 are performed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

It should be noted that the "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened, out of the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

At S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

At S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the special symbol control state number to "6". In this way, by performing the processing (S2121) for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of the preparation processing for opening the large winning opening, the control processing for opening the large winning opening (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed. will be performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

At S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

At S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the display command during opening of the big winning opening. The display command during the opening of the big winning opening reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large winning opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process, and shifts the process to the special symbol management process (Fig. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when S2131 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, a big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88) that counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2131 or a V attacker count switch that counts the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150 It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 88) is the value of the maximum winning number. The value of the V-attacker winning counter counted by the big winning opening count switch 2132 or the V-attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 .

When it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S2132), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when S2132 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2134. Transfer.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has passed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has passed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not passed (NO determination in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and continues the process. , returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

At S<b>2134 , the main CPU 2201 performs closing processing of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 . After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

At S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed again. See) will be performed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

At S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 at S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO determination in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing and also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94). , the processing is returned to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when S2141 determines YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

At S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g., variable probability flag, time-saving flag, etc.) and various counters (e.g., variable probability counter, time-saving counter, design fixed number counter, round counter, big winning entrance winning counter, etc.) set value Alternatively, reset processing is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

At S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot end processing, also terminates the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot end processing within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[4. Extension example]
An expansion example common to the above-described first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine and third pachinko game machine will be described below. In addition, since the symbols attached to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following description, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third Codes are omitted unless the explanation is limited to the pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Extension example of variable probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the type of jackpot, and when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the variable probability number is determined. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be adopted.

For example, during the execution of the big hit game control process, it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the big winning opening is passed, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, a big hit It may be a so-called V probability variation machine that sets the probability variation flag to ON at the end of the game control process. It should be noted that the specific area, for example, by operating the movable member in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process, the open state in which the passage of the game ball is possible or easy, and the entry of the game ball is prohibited It can be displaced into a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability variation machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passage of the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process can be different.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. A diagram showing when the open mode of the area is the first open mode, (B) when the open mode of the specific area is the second open mode, and (C) when the open mode of the specific area is the third open mode. is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. It should be noted that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the big winning hole is opened for a short time and then long open, the opening mode of the big winning hole is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the big winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the start of the long opening of the big winning hole. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is in the open state, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the big winning opening to the end of the long opening of the big winning opening. ing. Therefore, during execution of the big-hit game control process, it is extremely easy for at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is set to ON very easily at the end of the big hit game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, during the short opening of the special prize opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special prize opening is started (these two times are short ), the specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening passes through the specific area, it can be either the first opening mode or the second opening mode. is difficult compared to That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, when the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability variation flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. set.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area as an example of the opening mode of the specific area. , the first opening mode and the second opening mode are provided. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big winning opening can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two modes. It is possible to use only one mode, or three or more modes.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning opening, it is difficult to pass through the specific area. As an example of , the example of providing the third opening mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even if it is one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot, it is difficult for even one game ball to pass through the specific area. The mode is not limited, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the hit/lose determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit), the first special symbol and the second The winning selection symbol command of 2 special symbols is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. selected, and with a selectivity of 50%, "z2" is selected. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the selection symbol command at the time of hit is, for example, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. selected, with a selectivity of 35%, "z5" is selected.

FIG. 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot A). Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined as the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot B). When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode jackpot (10R probability variable jackpot C).

That is, according to the above FIGS. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be the 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and 10%. 10R normal jackpot A is determined with a selection rate of , and 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the type of the big win is determined to be the 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%. , is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability variation flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to have different probabilities of being set on.

It should be noted that, in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which it is opened by time control as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 107, it may be in an open state according to the winning of the game ball into the big winning opening.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is a big winning (Example of control to be in an open state based on winning a prize in the mouth), when (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second It is a figure which shows when it is an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is opened, the first game ball enters the big winning hole, and the big winning hole is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, based on this detection, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. When the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the big winning hole is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during the execution of the big-hit game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have won the big-winning opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variation flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variation flag is not set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second open mode of another example, after the big winning hole is in the open state, the first game ball wins the big winning hole, Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole counting switch, the specific area remains until the winning hole is closed. does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult for even one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that have entered the jackpot to pass through the specific area compared to the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability variation flag to be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area with good timing, the probability changes at the end of the big hit game control process. Flag is set on.

It should be noted that, in the above, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the example in which the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process has been described, but not limited to this, for example , When the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the time saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the above, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area. Although the example provided has been described, it is not limited to this, and for example, an open mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an open mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Although the example that can be determined to the difficult third mode has been described, it is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one It may be configured such that only the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area is determined.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is opened twice during a short opening of the special winning opening and for a predetermined time after the long opening of the special winning opening is started. Although it is in the open state for a short period of time (in both cases), if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the number of times the specific area is opened may be one or more times. There may be.

In addition, the specific area is closed according to the elapse of a predetermined opening time, the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. and so on. Also, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

In addition, the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variation control is executed (for example, high probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state, etc.) are a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is alternately and repeatedly executed until it is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is a game state in which probability variation control is not executed. (For example, normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is controlled. At this time, the loop count is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of times of the limiter may be a fixed number of times, or may be determined, for example, according to the symbol random number value of the special symbol, or determined by a predetermined lottery. In the case of a setting machine, the number of limiter times may be changed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, in the above, the jackpot game state and the game state in which probability variation control is executed alternately and repeatedly executed until reaching the limiter number of times so-called limiter machine has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the jackpot game state , and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be repeatedly executed alternately until the number of times of the limiter is reached. In particular, it is effective in the case of a one-kind-two-kind machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

Further, in the case of the above-described V probability variation machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the game state in which the probability variation control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability variable machine, if the number of limiters is set to N times, for example, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, assuming that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, The game state after the jackpot game control process is finished is controlled to the game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the N-th big hit game control process, although it does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, the specific area is played during the execution of the big hit game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the big hit game control process is finished is controlled to a game state in which the variable probability control is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the big hit game control process, the same applies to the gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the game state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-short-time gaming state, etc.) in which probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are performed is controlled to a predetermined When the special symbol game of the number of times is performed, it may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a game state (for example, normal game state, time saving game state, etc.) in which variable probability control is not executed. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which variable probability control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "ST number") may be a fixed number of times, or may be different each time. In the case of a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may differ according to the set value. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called fall type game machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the variable probability control is terminated based on the result of the fall lottery. , It may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.

[4-2. Extension example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a big win, time saving control can be executed after the big win game control process is finished. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random number out of the random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole (for example, a special symbol hit determination A random number, a symbol random number of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time-saving winning/losing determining process for determining whether or not to execute time-saving control separately from the special symbol winning determining process. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, when performing a time-saving win-loss determination, for example, the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol random When it is a numerical value, it can be determined to be "time saving hit" in which time saving control is executed. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed.

In addition, when performing the time saving winning/losing determination processing separately from the special symbol winning determining processing, the time saving winning/losing determining processing may be executed prior to the special symbol winning determining processing in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving win-lose determination process, the random number for time-saving win-lose determination exclusively provided for the time-saving win-lose determination process is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving win-lose is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time saving winning/losing determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time saving winning/losing.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start opening, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, It may be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a large prize winning opening or the like. Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process is provided, and based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area, for example, a random value that is used for the time-saving win-lose determination process is extracted. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special symbol winning/losing determination process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed during the variable display of the special symbols from which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the final display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

In addition, the sub CPU can grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving hit" or "time-saving loss" by appearance or easy effect image (for example, variable effect of decorative pattern or character It is preferable to execute control to display a display effect by ) on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination process, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp whether the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is "time-saving win" or "time-saving loss" by appearance, time-saving win-lose determination A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variable effect of decorative patterns, a display effect by characters, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the appearance whether the result of processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss". You may execute the control displayed in the . In this case, interest can be maintained until the result of the time-saving win-lose determination process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a game ball shooting method recommended in the big win game state. It is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit", the sub CPU, when the time saving control is executed Control is performed so that an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball shooting method is displayed on the display device. However, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", the effect image showing the method of shooting the game ball recommended when the time-saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on the "time reduction hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), etc., it is not displayed. You may do so. In addition, said specific condition is not restricted to what makes a condition the number of times of time saving, It can be set as arbitrary conditions suitably.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed before the special symbol winning determination process is executed, the sub CPU is under the condition of "time-saving hit" (that is, the time-saving flag is set to ON). Whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed may be controlled to display a performance image that can be grasped from the appearance or is easily grasped on the display device.

In addition, the type of random number used in the time saving judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time saving judgment process, the condition to be determined as time saving in the time saving judgment process, the execution timing of the time saving judgment process, the time saving judgment process can be executed, the mode of the time-saving game state, the time-saving number of times set at the time of the time-saving hit, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the time-saving number of times, the time-saving hit probability, and the time-saving judgment Processing related to time saving, such as processing result display, is summarized below.

(Types of random numbers used for time-saving hit-loss judgment processing)
The random numbers used in the time-saving hit-and-fall determination process are, for example, the random numbers for special design hit determination, the random numbers for special design determination, the random numbers for normal hit determination, the random numbers for normal design determination, the random numbers for special design fall determination, and It may be any one of a plurality of types of random numbers such as a dedicated time-saving hit-or-lose determination random number. Moreover, if it is a setting machine, when changing the setting, the time saving win-lose determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time saving judgment process is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving judgment random number value), but multiple types of random number values (for example, the special symbol per judgment random number value and the random number value for design determination ) may be used for determination.

(Timing of extracting random numbers used for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random value used for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is when the game ball enters the starting port, which triggers the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit determination process. It may be any timing such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving hit-or-lose determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process may be performed based on the winning of a specific prize winning opening where prize balls are dispensed, or a specific gate or specific out where no prize balls are dispensed. It may also be based on passage through the mouth or the like.

It should be noted that, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the start opening, the game ball wins either the first start opening or the second start opening. Even if there is, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted, or only when the game ball wins in any one of the specific start openings, the random number for time saving win-lose determination may be extracted.

(Conditions that are determined to be time-saving in the time-saving hit/loss determination process)
When performing time saving judgment processing using the extracted random number for time saving judgment processing, the extracted random number for time saving judgment judgment is a specific random number for time saving judgment judgment (for example, specific time saving judgment value data). It is good to make it determined that it is a time-saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving judgment process using the random number for judging the special symbol, the time saving when it is the specific loss judgment value data, the specific small hit judgment value data or/and the specific big hit judgment value data It is preferable to make it judged as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving winning/losing determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving hit is determined when it is a specific losing symbol, a particular small winning symbol, or a specific big winning symbol. . Also, when the time-saving hit-loss determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random number value, it may be determined that the time-saving hit is determined when the random number data for the special symbol fall determination is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time saving win-lose determination process using the setting value after the change, it is good to be determined to be a time saving hit when it is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case of performing time-saving winning/losing determination processing using random numbers for normal hit determination and random numbers for determining normal symbols. Furthermore, the conditions for determining that the time-saving win-lose determination process is not limited to the above conditions, can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving hit", the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S2023 in FIG. And when the game ball entering the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 2152 is opened, whether or not the time saving control is executed and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of the opening of the accessory. It is better to Then, the jackpot game control process is executed without detecting the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the accession hit and the V attacker 2152 has opened. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time saving control and the number of times of time saving based on the "time saving win" if the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". However, the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving loss", the result of the special symbol winning determination process is the opening hit, and the game ball entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens. does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
When executing the time-saving win-lose determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random number for time-saving win-lose determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting port, the main CPU is the starting information of the special symbol. In the same way, it is better to reserve the random number value for the time saving judgment that was obtained.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win-lose determination process immediately after extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process (for example, before being suspended), or suspend the extracted random number, The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state that can execute time-saving win-lose determination processing)
The time-saving hit/loss determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or the game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, normal It may be executed only in a game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). Also, for example, to execute the time saving win-lose determination process in any game state, to execute the time saving win-lose determination process only in a specific game state, the conditions for executing the time saving win-lose determination process are determined in advance, and this definition It may be so that the time-saving win-lose determination process is executed when the conditions are satisfied.

(Aspect of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag are prepared, and when time-saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time-saving flag is set to ON, and based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to ON. In this case, when the 1st time saving flag is set to ON, and when the 2nd time saving flag is set to ON, it is good to perform time saving control with a different function. For example, when the first time saving flag is set on, both special figure shortening control and electric sapo control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set on, special figure shortening control and electric sapo Only one of the controls can be performed. Also, when the first time saving flag is set to ON, control to the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control, and the second time saving flag is turned on If it is set to , it may be controlled to the second time-saving game state in which only the electric sapo control is performed out of the special figure shortening control and the electric sapo control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags to set on is not limited to the above. It may be determined according to the game state when it is played.

(Time saving number of times set at time saving hit)
It is preferable to determine the number of times of time saving set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving hit" according to the game state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, not limited to this, for example, if a plurality of time saving hit-or-loss judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the number of time saving times to be set to the game state when the time saving hit-or-fall judgment process is performed Instead or in addition, it may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination. For example, if the random number value for time saving hit/loss determination extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit determination value data, the number of time saving times is determined to be "100", and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of times of time saving to be "50".

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may newly set the number of times of time saving determined based on the 'time saving hit' instead of the remaining number of times of saving time (that is, reset the remaining number of times of saving time). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of times of saving time is greater or less than the remaining number of times of saving time, and the range of game characteristics is expanded, and the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is turned on is interesting. It is possible to make it have and increase interest.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit , the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction win" to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the remaining number of times of time saving does not become less than the current remaining number of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the game state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition, even in a game state in which time saving control is executed (for example, a high probability time saving game state, a time saving game state, etc.), the time saving win-lose determination process is executed, and the result of this time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving hit ”, the main CPU replaces the number of times of time saving determined based on the “time saving hit” with the remaining number of times of time saving and newly sets the number of time saving times determined based on the “time saving hit” to the number of time saving remaining. Among the processing to be added to the number of times, any one may be determined in advance, and the number of times of working hours may be set in a mode that satisfies this predetermined condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that performs time saving control with different functions when the first time saving flag is set on and when the second time saving flag is set on, time saving win-lose determination processing If the result is "time saving hit", the main CPU, the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are time saving control of the same function and time saving of different functions You may make it change the process which sets the number of times of time saving with the case of control. For example, if the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function of time saving control, the number of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" to the remaining number of time saving In addition, if the time saving control that is executed based on the time saving control being executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" is a time saving control with a different function, instead of the time saving remaining number of times that is being executed, based on the "time saving hit" You may make it newly set the number of times of time saving determined by (that is, reset the remaining number of times of time saving). In addition, if the time-saving control that is executed based on the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control that is executed based on the "time-saving hit" are different functions, after all the remaining time-saving times during execution are consumed, time-saving based on the "time-saving hit" You may make it perform control.

In addition, when the number of times of time saving is set based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "hit", the number of times of time saving may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time saving to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win". In addition, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is 'time-saving win' and the number of times of time-saving is set to '0', the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Start timing of time saving control)
The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving win" can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time saving control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning/losing determination process is the special symbol winning determination process in the same frame. If performed earlier, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is "time-saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, invalidate the "time-saving hit" (based on "time-saving hit" It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set to ON based on the hit selection pattern command (the time saving flag may not be set to ON depending on the type of big win).

Moreover, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving winning/losing determination process is "time saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, in the same frame, if the time saving hit/loss determination process is performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process, based on the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process, immediately (before the special symbol hit determination process is performed) even if the time saving control is started. good. In this case, the game state (that is, whether or not time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number used for the time-saving win-lose determination process and the execution of the time-saving win-lose determination process, and it is possible to enhance the interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the fact that the result of the time saving win-lose determination process is "time saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win-lose determination process becomes "time saving hit", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU executes the fanning effect of whether or not the time saving control is started, It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the fact that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends Based on, it is preferable to start the time saving control based on the big hit. In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a per access (a per access for opening the time saving control) and when the V attacker 2152 opens, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 Also when big-hit game control is performed by having detected, it is good to start time saving control based on the end of big-hit game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit/loss determination process is "time saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the role release hit Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU is based on the closure of the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the time saving based on the "time saving winning". It is good to start controlling.

(End timing of time-saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed over the set number of time saving times", "in the game state in which the time saving control is performed , When it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or "When the number of times of time reduction is set to 0 times even though the result of the time reduction hit/loss determination process was a time reduction hit" etc. is.

It should be noted that, in the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed, if the small hitting game control processing is executed based on the result of the special symbol per determination processing, the time saving control continues to be executed even after the small hitting game control processing ends. be done.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time saving control, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving a stop symbol mode indicating that the special symbol hit determination process is a prize open hit. However, when the V-attacker 2152 is opened, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control processing is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to operate even after the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to implement time saving control.

(Time-saving number of rewrites)
In the game state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving game state, time-saving game state, etc.) in which time-saving control is executed, the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, and when the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination processing is "time-saving hit", the main CPU , You may rewrite the number of times of working hours, and do not rewrite the number of times of working hours (that is, to execute the time saving control until the number of times of working time saving control is digested).

In addition, when rewriting the number of times of time saving, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of times of time saving determined based on the "time saving hit" at the time when the number of times of time saving in the time saving control being executed is consumed, It may be set at the time of execution of the special design hit determination process, it may be set at the time of starting or stopping the variable display of the special design, it may be set at the time of the time saving success determination process, and it may be set at various timings. can do. In addition, when setting at the time of time saving hit-loss determination processing, the time saving number of times determined based on the "time saving hit" will be overwritten to the time saving number of times in the time saving control being executed. Alternatively, one of "rewrite the number of time saving" and "add to the previous number of time saving" may be determined in advance, and the number of time saving may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When the time reduction win-lose determination processing is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port or the second start port, the time reduction win-lose determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port (hereinafter referred to as "the 1 time reduction hit/loss determination process") and time reduction hit/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as "second time reduction hit/loss determination process") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port, the time reduction hit probability may be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed, or the second time saving win/loss determination process is performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when it is done, or when the first time saving win/loss determination process is performed and the second time saving win/loss determination process The time saving hit probability may be the same or almost the same probability as in the case where is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win-lose judgment processing)
A time saving judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time saving judgment process (whether it is a time saving hit or a time saving loss) or / and the time saving number determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process (time saving hit) A win-time reduction number display unit for displaying may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section may be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section and the like, and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU, for example, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, even if it displays the number of times of time saving determined based on the result of the time saving judgment process and / and the time saving hit. good.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, It may be longer than the interval time when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a loss and the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of decorative patterns is synchronized with the variable display of special patterns, in this case, the sub-CPU displays, for example, the liquid crystal It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit and the big win game control process is not executed based on this role release hit, the main CPU 2201 performs the time saving winning/losing. When the result of the judgment process is "time saving win", the interval time after the action for opening the accessory is longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving win-lose judgment process is "time saving loss". may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Expansion example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine described in this specification play games using game media, and offer benefits (for example, prizes) based on the results of the games. (balls, prize data, etc.) can be applied to all types of gaming machines. In other words, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) by physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the results of the game. Alternatively, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media owned by the player and enable a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit, which manages the game medium, that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed game balls, the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside so that the game can be played. Prize ball data as a game medium is provided instead. In this specification, "game value to be paid out" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is provided in the case of an enclosed game machine. Also, the game value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game media management device is a device provided in the gaming machine having ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to a game medium handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the game medium lending operation (that is, when the player performs the game medium insertion operation). or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media has been won (that winning combination is established) acquisition), or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used in a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by the player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As the game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. In addition, it is also possible to eject cash or a cash equivalent instead of ejecting the recording medium, or to store the information in a portable terminal or the like. Also, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted, and the member recording medium can be stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. not only can be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data related to the increase or decrease in the game medium associated with consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. In addition, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the game machine are provided without providing a ball polishing device. good too. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in from a winning opening provided in the game area.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game is over, all the game values (that is, the balls in possession) stored in the enclosed gaming machine are cleared, or some of the balls in possession are transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls is reduced. . Furthermore, game machines that shoot game balls from above the game area do not have the concept of foul balls, but if game balls are shot from below as in conventional gaming machines, foul balls are generated. sell. Therefore, in the case of a game machine that shoots game balls from below, the number of held balls increases or decreases depending on the presence or absence of foul balls. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed type game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game values managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continuously detect opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

It should be noted that the enclosed type game machine only needs to be configured so that the player cannot touch the game balls, for example, a type that circulates the game balls only in the game machine without circulating the game balls in the island facility. , and those in which the game balls circulate in the island facility but the players cannot touch the game balls are also included in the enclosed game machines.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. It is possible to confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game media management device, and the main control circuit and the game media management device are connected via the frame control circuit. A communication connection may be established with the game media management device. Also, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Take action to prevent it from happening.

More specifically, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big win symbol, the general game state is shifted to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game state is shifted to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU is under variable display. As for the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the group of LEDs is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the clocking of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine have been described as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other machines such as pachislot machines. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technique described in this specification is applied to a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, an effect accompanied by a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. The "stop" of the symbol includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and any interpretation of the "stop" is acceptable. In addition, the operation for playing the game by the player may be operation of a lever, a handle, a button, or the like, touch, or the like.

In a pachinko game machine, there are cases where the administrator of the gaming machine sets effects, etc. by operating the effect buttons, but there are cases where the player starts the game after setting the effect buttons. be. In this case, it is conceivable that an operation by the manager may result in an operation for the player to play a game. Similarly, in pachislot, it may be assumed that the administrator performs a 2-bet game and the player performs a 3-bet game in a state where the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established. In this case, the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc., may be operations for the player to play the game.

In the pachinko machine, the game method of the player is managed by notifying whether the game is right-handed or left-handed under the control of the main CPU. The fact that it is unintended may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, there are cases where the player's playing method, such as the player's pressing order (assist), is managed by the control of the main CPU. The unintended game may be notified by the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be mounted on one board. In pachi-slot, there may be no payout control board, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

In addition, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing containing devices necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the housing, the outer frame and the base door are regarded as the housing, and the entire game machine consisting of the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the plate unit is regarded as the housing. is possible. Between the housing and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit provided with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., or a door, a frame, a housing, etc. Various control boards, display means, decorations, accessories, etc. may be present in the device.

[4. game device]
Next, game machines applicable to the first to third pachinko game machines will be described as far as they are not inconsistent. It should be noted that, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first to third pachinko game machines, and the description thereof will be omitted as much as possible.

FIG. 108 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction. FIG. 109 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming machine when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.
The gaming machine 3000 includes a front cover unit 3100, a gaming unit 3200, and a back box 3300 arranged in order from front to back.

[4-1. Front cover unit]
The front cover unit 3100 includes a frame 3110 having an opening 3111 formed thereon, a protective glass 3120 formed of a material having transparency and provided so as to cover the front side of the opening 3111, and a rear side of the opening 3111. , and a rear cover 3130 which covers at least the game area 3015 of the game panel 100 from the front and which is made of a transparent material. The front cover unit 3100 is fixed to the back box 3300 with the game unit 3200 sandwiched therebetween. The front cover unit 3100 has the same function as the glass door 4 (see FIG. 2). The 3015 and the rear cover 3130 face each other so that the game area 3015 can be visually recognized from the front, and the game ball flowing down the game area 3015 can be prevented from jumping forward.

The frame 3110 is formed so that the width in the front-rear direction increases from the bottom to the top. Accordingly, the protective glass 3120 arranged on the front side of the opening 3111 is inclined downward in the front-rear direction. Therefore, inside the front cover unit 3100, a wider space is formed in the upper part than in the lower part, and a decorative member projecting forward in the game unit 3200 can be arranged in this space.

[4-2. Game unit overview]
The game unit 3200 integrates the game panel 3010 and various effect devices, which are examples of internal members arranged inside the back box 3300, and is arranged between the front cover unit 3100 and the back box 3300. Fixed at 3300. The game unit 3200 includes a first unit 3201, a second unit 3202, and a third unit 3203, which are stacked in order from the front to the rear, although the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 109, the game unit 3200 is provided with a plurality of engaging portions 3240 on the rear surface of the third unit 3203, and the engaging portions 3240 engage with the fixing portion 3310 of the back box 3300, which will be described later. , and fixed to the back box 3300 .

[4-3. back box]
The back box 3300 is formed in a box shape with an open front, has a rear surface 3301 arranged on the rear surface side of the game unit 3200 , and covers at least the rear surface side of the game unit 3200 . As shown in FIG. 108, the rear surface 3301 has an opening in the central portion, and the display device 7 is fixed so as to block the opening. A control board 3091, a sub-control board 3092, and the like are fixed. Such a backing box 3300 is an example of a backing member provided at least on the rear side of the inner member, having a rear surface located behind the inner member. In the description of the present embodiment, the back box 3300 will be described as an example of the back member. , a plate-shaped member, or any other member.

The main control board 3091 includes the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6), the main control circuit 1200 (see FIG. 70), and the main control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 88). A main control circuit can be implemented. Further, on the sub-control board 3092, an arbitrary circuit such as the sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described above), the sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described above), the sub-control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 88 described above), etc. A sub-control circuit can be implemented. In FIGS. 108 and 109, the main control board 3091 and the sub-control board 3092 are shown as reference numerals for convenience, but these boards are all accommodated in the board case.

In addition, the back box 3300 overlaps a first gripping portion 3200a of the game unit 3200 described later on one of the left and right ends of the front upper edge of the back box 3300, and is connected to a first gripping portion formed with a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. A portion 3300a, and a second gripping portion connection portion 3300b overlapping a second gripping portion 3200b of a game unit 3200, which will be described later, on the other left-right direction end side. The outer shape of the hole of the first gripping portion connection portion 3300a is formed to have substantially the same shape as the hole of the first gripping portion 3200a. On the other hand, no hole is formed in the second grip portion connecting portion 3300b.

FIG. 110 is an example of a diagram showing the appearance of the back box when viewed from the rear.
A plurality of fixing portions 3310 are formed around the display device 7, the main control board 91, and the sub-control board 92 on the rear surface 3301 of the back case 3300 (on the outer edge side of the rear surface 3301). A plurality of fixing portions 3310 are formed in empty spaces (parts to which various members are not attached) on the rear surface 3301 at intervals that allow the required strength of the back case 3300 to be maintained. The fixing part 3310 is three holes arranged at a predetermined interval, and the orientation thereof may be arranged in any direction depending on the space, but may be arranged in the vertical direction or rotated by 90 degrees. It is preferable to arrange them in the horizontal direction. By arranging them in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction rotated by 90 degrees in this way, the orientation of the engaging portion 3240 that engages with the fixing portion 3310 can be easily adjusted. In FIG. 110, the reference numerals of the fixing portion 3310 corresponding to the engaging portion 3240 shown in FIG. 109 are underlined for easy understanding. In addition, in FIG. 110, all of the fixing portions 3310 are shown in the same shape as the three holes in the portion denoted by reference numeral 3310 .

FIG. 111 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the engaging portion when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the rearward direction. FIG. 112 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the fixing portion when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction. Arrows a, b, and c shown in FIG. 111 lead to arrows a, b, and c shown in FIG. 112, respectively.
FIG. 113 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a state in which the fixing portion and the engaging portion are engaged.

As shown in FIG. 111, the engaging portion 3240 is fixed to a base portion 3204 arranged at the rear end of the third unit 3203, and includes a main shaft portion 3241, a shaft portion 3242, a contact portion 3243, and a projecting portion 3244. , and a locking portion 3245 .

The main shaft portion 3241 is formed of a cylindrical body, fixed to the base portion 3204 at its base end side, and extends rearward. As shown in FIG. 113, the main shaft portion 3241 extends in the front-rear direction and forms an insertion hole 3241a into which the base end side of the shaft portion 3242 is inserted, and the bottom of the insertion hole 3241a, with which the base end of the shaft portion 3242 abuts. and a bottom portion 3241b. The shaft portion 3242 has its proximal end inserted into the insertion hole 3241a, its proximal end in contact with the bottom portion 3241b, and is fixed to the bottom portion 3241b by a fixing member (such as a screw) 3241c.

The shaft portion 3242 is formed of a shaft-like body, and the base end side thereof is partially inserted into the insertion hole 3241a from the distal end side of the main shaft portion 3241 to be fitted inside the main shaft portion 3241 and to the bottom portion 3241b. , is fixed by a fixing member 3241c. In this way, by providing the main shaft portion 3241 extending rearward of the base portion 3204 and the shaft portion 3242 inserted into the main shaft portion 3241 from the rear side, a space is provided between the base portion 3204 and the fixed portion 3310. , the base portion 3204 can be fixed to the fixing portion 3310 . Here, as shown in FIG. 111, the base portion 3204 is formed with a connector communication hole 3204c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the connectors 3200C provided on the rear surface of various devices of the game unit 3200 are inserted. In the space between the base portion 3204 and the fixing portion 3310, for example, cables connecting the connector 3200C and the main control board 3091 and the sub control board 3092 fixed to the back box 3300 are arranged.

The contact portion 3243 is fixed to the tip of the shaft portion 3242 and has a contact surface 3243 a facing the rear surface 3301 of the back case 3300 . Note that the distance from the tip of the main shaft portion 3241 to the contact surface 3243 a may be adjustable by the amount of insertion of the shaft portion 3242 into the main shaft portion 3241 . This makes it possible to adjust the distance from the rear surface of the third unit 3203 to the rear surface 3301 of the back box 3300 .

The projecting portion 3244 is a projection projecting rearward from the contact surface 3243a of the contact portion 3243, and is arranged at an equal distance from the locking portion 3245 (in FIG. 1151). By arranging the plurality of projecting portions 3244 at equal distances from the locking portion 3245 and arranging them in a straight line, the plurality of projecting portions 3244 are arranged at the same position even if the contact portion 3243 is reversed. At the time of assembling the game machine, the contact part 3243 can be attached without paying attention to the orientation thereof, so that work efficiency is improved.

The locking portion 3245 is formed substantially in the center of the contact surface 3243a of the contact portion 3243, and is provided with a fixing member 3320 (for example, a screw or the like) passing through a fixing portion 3310 (see FIG. 112) of the back box 3300, which will be described later. is a hole that can be locked (a hole into which a screw can be screwed).

As shown in FIG. 112, the fixing portion 3310 includes an insertion portion 3311 and a penetrating portion 3312 .

The insertion portion 3311 is a hole penetrating the rear surface 3301, and is provided with a plurality (two in the example shown in FIG. 112) at the same intervals as the plurality of protrusions 3244 of the engaging portion 3240, and the protrusions 3244 are inserted from the front. formed as possible.

The penetrating portion 3312 is formed of a hole having a diameter through which a portion of the fixing member 3320 (for example, the neck portion of the screw) penetrates but the other portion of the fixing member 3320 (for example, the head portion of the screw) cannot penetrate. 3311 at an intermediate position. That is, the penetrating portion 3312 is provided at a position overlapping the locking portion 3245 of the engaging portion 3240 when the projecting portion 3244 of the engaging portion 3240 is inserted into the insertion portion 3311 .

With this configuration, the contact portion 3243 of the engaging portion 3240 is brought into contact with the rear surface 3301 of the back box 3300 so that the projecting portion 3244 of the engaging portion 3240 is inserted into the insertion portion 3311 of the fixing portion 3310. , the fixing member 3320 is caused to penetrate a part of the through portion 3312 from the rear of the rear surface 3301 and be locked to the locking portion 3245 . Thereby, the game unit 3200 can be fixed to the back box 3300 .

[4-2. Game unit details]
FIG. 114 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the game unit when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction.
The game unit 3200 is an example of internal members, and includes a game panel 3010, a winning unit 3205 provided on the game panel 3010, a first unit 3201 including a first decoration device 3230, a second decoration device 3250, A second unit 3202 including a third decoration device 3260 and the like, and a third unit 3203 including a fourth decoration device 3270, a base portion 3204 and the like are provided.

(game panel)
The game panel 3010 can have all or part of the configuration of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 69), and the game panel 2100 (see FIG. 87) unless there is a contradiction. . Also, all or part of the components attached to the game panel 100, the game panel 1100, and the game panel 2100 can be attached to the game panel 3010. FIG.

In addition, the game panel 3010 is an example of an internal member, and a first grip portion 3200a having a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on one side of the left-right direction end side at the front upper edge of the upper part, and a hole on the other side. A second gripping portion 3200b is provided on the left-right direction end side at a position spaced apart from the first gripping portion 3200a, extends from the front surface toward the rear surface, and has a non-penetrating hole formed therein. When the game unit 3200 is fixed to the back box 3300, the first grip part 3200a overlaps the first grip part connection part 3300a (see FIG. 109) of the back box 3300, and the second grip part 3200b is connected to the back box 3300. It overlaps with the second grip portion connecting portion 3300b (see FIG. 109).

(first unit)
FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the first unit when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction. FIG. 115 shows a state in which the front cover and ball passage 3220 of the winning unit 3205 and the first decoration part 3231 of the first decoration device 3230 are moved forward.

(winning unit)
The winning unit 3205 includes a flow path 3206 through which game balls pass, an electric accessory 3210 provided in the flow path 3206, and a ball path 3220 arranged below the flow path 3206 and distributing downed game balls. . The winning unit 3205 includes the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), the special electric accessory 1133 (see FIG. 69), the V winning device 2150 (see FIG. 87), and the special electric accessory 2133 (see FIG. 87). For example, it can be used as a device for blocking or opening the path of game balls under the control of the main control circuit.

FIG. 116 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the portion of the flow path provided with the electric accessory when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction. FIG. 117 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the portion provided with the electric accessory when viewed obliquely from the upper left in the rearward direction.

Channels 3206 include a first channel 3206A, a second channel 3206B, a third channel 3206C, and a fourth channel 3206D.

The first flow path 3206A is formed by a shutter 3211, which will be described later, on the bottom surface through which the game balls flowing into the winning unit 3205 pass and the game balls flow down. The first flow path 3206A is provided with a plurality of deceleration means 3206a protruding from the side wall, extending in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows, and decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball at predetermined intervals.

Below the first flow path 3206A, the second flow path 3206B is separated from the first flow path 3206A by the shutter 3211 when the shutter 3211, which will be described later, protrudes, and the first flow path 3206A when the shutter 3211 is retracted. communicate. A prize ball opening in which a prize ball switch 3153 is arranged is provided at the downstream end of the second flow path 3206B. Prize ball switch 3153 functions in the same manner as V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), for example. The second flow path 3206B is provided with deceleration means 3206b that protrudes from the side wall, extends in the direction in which the game ball flows down, and decelerates the rolling speed of the game ball.

The third flow path 3206C continues to the end of the first flow path 3206A, and in a state in which the shutter 3211 protrudes, game balls that have passed through the first flow path 3206A enter. The game ball that has flowed into the third flow path 3206C is discharged. The third flow path 3206C protrudes from the side wall, extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows, and is provided with a plurality of deceleration means 3206c that decelerates the rolling speed of the game ball at predetermined intervals.

The fourth flow path 3206D is arranged below the second flow path 3206B, connected to the second flow path 3206B via the prize ball switch 3157, inclined in one direction, Tilt in the opposite direction. A movable piece 3158 that protrudes into the flow path 3206 and retreats is provided at the downstream end of the fourth flow path 3206D. At the downstream side of the movable piece 3158, there is provided a discharge port in which a non-V prize discharge switch 3157 is arranged. When the movable piece 3158 protrudes into the flow path 3206, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth flow path 3206D enters the discharge port and is detected by the discharge switch 3157 at the time of non-V winning, and the movable piece 3158 moves to the flow path. When the ball is retracted from inside 3206 , the ball enters the V winning opening and is detected by the V winning opening switch 3156 . The movable piece 3158 is movable by, for example, a solenoid, and functions similarly to the V shutter 2158 (see FIG. 88). The V winning opening switch 3156 functions similarly to the V winning opening switch 2156, for example. In the fourth flow path 3206D, a deceleration means 3206d that protrudes from the side wall, extends in the direction in which the game ball flows down, and decelerates the rolling speed of the game ball, has a portion inclined in one direction and an inclined portion in the opposite direction. It is provided in each of the parts to be used.

As shown in FIG. 117, the electric accessory 3210 includes a shutter 3211 that is an example of a shielding section, a shutter holding member 3212, and a shutter driving section 3213 that is an example of a driving section.

As shown in FIG. 116, the shutter 3211 is formed in a plate shape, and moves in the front-rear direction to protrude into the channel 3206 and retreat from the channel 3206 .

The shutter holding member 3212 is arranged under the shutter 3211 and supports the left and right side edges of the shutter 3211 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Further, the shutter holding member 3212 holds the shutter driving section 3213 under the shutter 3211 .

FIGS. 118 and 119 are examples of perspective views showing the external appearance of the shutter drive unit when viewed obliquely from the upper left in the forward direction. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the state of the shutter driving section 3213 when the shutter 3211 is projected into the channel 3206. FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the state of the shutter driving section 3213 when the shutter 3211 is retracted from the channel 3206. FIG.

The shutter driving section 3213 is arranged below the shutter 3211 and includes a solenoid 3214 as an example of driving means and a shaft member 3215 .

The solenoid 3214 includes a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6), a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70), a V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88), a V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88), and a special electric solenoid 2135. (see FIG. 88), etc., the moving member 3213a is driven based on the control of the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109). Specifically, the solenoid 3214 moves the moving member 3213a in a direction (horizontal direction in the example shown in FIG. 118) orthogonal to the moving direction of the shutter 3211 (front-back direction in the example shown in FIG. 118). The moving member 3213a is provided with an upwardly extending solenoid projection 3213b. The shutter 3211 is such that the solenoid 3214 protrudes into the channel 3206 in the initial state shown in FIG. In the moving state (when the moving member 3213a is energized and the moving member 3213a is close to the main body of the solenoid 3214), the moving member 3213a is retracted from the channel 3206. FIG.

The shaft member 3215 is arranged below the shutter 3211 and above the solenoid 3214. One end of the shaft member 3215 engages with the shutter 3211, and the other end of the shaft member 3215 across a predetermined position a engages with the solenoid 3214. is provided so as to be rotatable around the Specifically, the shaft member 3215 is rotatably supported by the shutter holding member 3212 at a predetermined position a, and a long side portion 3215a extending from the predetermined position a in one of the directions perpendicular to the moving direction of the shutter 3211. and a short side portion 3215b extending from a predetermined position a in the other direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the shutter 3211 and shorter than the long side portion 3215a.

The long side 3215a engages with the shutter 3211 at one end (leftward in the example shown in FIG. 118). Specifically, the shutter 3211 has a shutter protrusion 3211a extending downward from the bottom surface at substantially the center of the rear side edge. The long side portion 3215a has a bifurcated end, and the bifurcated end is engaged with the shutter projection 3211a.

The short side portion 3215b is engaged with the solenoid projection 3213b of the solenoid 3214 at the other end (the right side in the example shown in FIG. 118). Specifically, the short side portion 3215b extends in a direction inclined in the moving direction of the shutter 3211 with respect to the direction in which the long side portion 3215a extends. The short side portion 3215b has a first surface 3215c against which the solenoid projection 3213b abuts when the solenoid 3214 shifts from the initial state to the moving state, and a first surface 3215c on which the solenoid 3214 shifts from the moving state to the initial state. A second surface 3215d with which the solenoid projection 3213b abuts is formed.

When the solenoid 3214 is in the initial state shown in FIG. 118, the first surface 3215c of the shaft member 3215 faces the moving direction of the moving member 3213a, and when the solenoid 3214 is in the moving state shown in FIG. It faces the direction of movement of 3213a. As a result, the force that moves the moving member 3213a by the solenoid 3214 can be reliably converted into the force that rotates the shaft member 3215 .

With such a configuration, in the winning unit 3205, the shutter 3211 protrudes into the channel 3206 in the initial state shown in FIG. In the winning unit 3205, when the solenoid 3214 is energized under the control of the main control circuit, the moving member 3213a and the solenoid projection 3213b move toward the long side portion 3215a of the shaft member 3215. FIG. Then, the solenoid projection 3213b comes into contact with the first surface 3215c of the short side portion 3215b, the shaft member 3215 rotates about the predetermined position a, and the end of the long side portion 3215a engaged with the shutter projection 3211a moves backward. move to As a result, the shutter 3211 is retracted from the flow path 3206, resulting in the state shown in FIG.

The shaft member 3215 engages with the shutter projection 3211a of the shutter 3211 at the end of the long side 3215a, and the solenoid 3214 is engaged with the end of the short side 3215b across the predetermined position a, which is the center of rotation. Engagement with the solenoid projection 3213b allows the shutter 3211 to move a longer distance than the movement distance of the solenoid projection 3213b.

(ball passage)
FIG. 120 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the ball passage when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.
The ball passage 3220 allows game balls to pass through and distribute the passing game balls, and includes a first passage 3221, a second passage 3222, a wall member 3223, and a passable space 3224.

The first passage 3221 guides the game ball that enters from the first inlet 3221a and flows down in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the winning opening).

The second passage 3222 is arranged adjacent to the first passage 3221, and discharges game balls that have passed through the passable space 3224 and game balls that have entered from the second inlet 3222a. The second passage 3222 protrudes from the side wall on the upper end side of the wall member 3223 at a position close to the wall member 3223, extends in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the wall member 3223, and reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. A deceleration means 3222b is provided. The decelerating means 3222 b decelerates the rolling speed of the game ball that has entered the second passage 3222 from the first passage 3221 over the wall member 3223 .

The wall member 3223 is arranged between the first passage 3221 and the second passage 3222 with which the game ball flowing down the first passage 3221 abuts. The wall member 3223, for example, is provided in the first passage 3221 so as to face the direction in which the game ball has flowed down, and the game ball comes into contact with the wall member 3223 to guide the game ball in a direction different from the direction in which the game ball has flowed down.

The passable space 3224 is a space formed above the wall member 3223 and is a space larger than the diameter of the game ball. is a space for passing through and entering the second passage 3222 .

FIG. 121 is an example of a diagram showing the appearance of the ball passage when viewed from the rear.
FIG. 122 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the ball passage base when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the forward direction.
The ball passage 3220 has an open rear side and is covered with a ball passage base 3225 (see FIG. 122).

The ball passage base 3225 includes a base member 3226 covering the rear side of the ball passage 3220, a movable piece 3227 attached to the front side of the base member 3226, a first switch 3228 and a second switch 3229.

The base member 3226 is formed in the shape of a wall that covers the rear side of the ball passage 3220, and penetrates in the front-rear direction through a first opening 3226a, a second opening 3226b, a third opening 3226c, a fourth opening 3226d and a fifth opening 3226e. Prepare.

The first opening 3226 a is an opening for discharging the game ball that has passed through the first switch 3228 to the rear side of the base member 3226 .
The second opening 3226b is provided at the lowest part of the first passage 3221, and is an opening into which a game ball entering the first passage 3221 enters.
The third opening 3226c is a passage arranged on the rear side of the base member 3226 and communicates with the second opening 3226b. It is an open mouth.
The fourth opening 3226d is provided below the third opening 3226c with the second switch 3229 interposed therebetween. It is an opening for discharge.
The fifth opening 3226e is provided at the bottom of the second passage 3222, and the game ball that has passed through the wall member 3223 from the first passage 3221 and entered the second passage 3222 is discharged to the rear side of the base member 3226. is.

The movable piece 3227 is disposed at a position that vertically divides the first passage 3221 so that the game ball entered from the first inlet 3221a can move in the inclined direction, and the game ball can pass through. It can be displaced into a state in which it falls and falls. The movable piece 3227 has, for example, the same function as the special electric shutter 2134 (see FIG. 87).

The first switch 3228 is provided at a position where the game ball that has moved is entered by the movable piece 3227 that allows the game ball to move in the tilt direction. The first switch 3228 has, for example, the same function as the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88).

The second switch 3229 is provided between the third opening 3226c and the fourth opening 3226d, and is provided at a position through which the game ball dropped from the third opening 3226c passes. The second switch 3229, for example, may have the same function as the general prize winning port switch 2123 (see FIG. 88), the passage gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 88), etc., and detects discharged game balls. It may function as a sensor.

In such a ball passage 3220, a game ball entered from the first inlet 3221a is guided toward the first switch 3228 by the movable piece 3227 when the movable piece 3227 is movable in the tilt direction. , is detected by the first switch 3228, and then discharged to the rear side of the base member 3226 through the first opening 3226a.

In addition, the game ball entered from the first inlet 3221a moves to the bottom of the first passage 3221 when the movable piece 3227 is in a state in which the game ball passes and falls, and enters the second opening 3226b. Then, it returns to the front side of the base member 3226 through the third opening 3226c, falls, passes through the second switch 3229, and is discharged to the rear side of the base member 3226 through the fourth opening 3226d.

Here, the game ball entered from the first inlet 3221a, when the movable piece 3227 is in a state in which the game ball passes and falls, the game ball flows down the first passage 3221 and collides with the wall member 3223. and change the direction of flow. If such a wall member 3223 for changing the flow of the game ball is provided, the game ball may come into contact with the wall member 3223 and stop. When there is such a game ball b1 that has stopped, the game ball b2 that comes next rides on the game ball b1, contacts the wall member 3223 and stops, and there is a case where the ball is jammed as it is. be. According to this embodiment, since the passable space 3224 is provided, the game ball b3 that has flowed down next collides with the game ball b2, and passes the game ball b2 through the passable space 3224 to the second By pushing out to the passage 3222 and discharging, it is possible to avoid ball clogging.

Then, the game ball pushed out to the second passage 3222 moves to the bottom of the second passage 3222 and is discharged to the rear side of the base member 3226 from the fifth opening 3226e. In addition, the game ball entered from the second inlet 3222a moves to the second passage 3222, moves to the bottom of the second passage 3222, and is discharged to the rear side of the base member 3226 from the fifth opening 3226e. .

(First decoration device)
Returning to FIG. 114, the first decoration device 3230 is an example of a third decoration member, and in the initial state, is arranged behind the decoration cover 3230a and is arranged at a position invisible to the player. The first decoration device 3230 moves from under the decoration cover 3230a to a position where the first decoration part 3231 is visible to the player.

The decorative cover 3230a is a decorative member formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, has an opening at the bottom through which the first decorative portion 3231 can be inserted, and has a shape having a predetermined meaning, such as a character, formed on the front surface. .

As shown in FIG. 115, the first decoration device 3230 includes a first decoration portion 3231 formed in a predetermined shape and a driving portion 3232 for moving the first decoration portion 3231 .

FIG. 123 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the first decorative portion when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction.
The first decoration part 3231 is a combination of a shape suggesting a direction to the player (for example, the direction in which the ball entrance is open) and a pattern (for example, 7) when viewed from the front. It includes a base portion 3231a, a lens portion 3231c, and a decorative portion 3231d, which are formed to have substantially the same shape when viewed from the front.

The base part 3231a is arranged at the rearmost part of the first decoration part 3231, and is engaged with the driving part 3232 on the rear surface side, and has a light emitting board 3231b on which an LED, which is an example of a light emitting means, is arranged on the front side. there is

The light emitting board 3231b causes the LED to emit light under the control of the sub control board 3092 . The sub-control board 3092, for example, when the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109) opens the ball entrance in the direction suggested by the shape of the first decorative portion 3231 (for example, the electric accessory 3210 shown in FIG. 116 When the shutter 3211 is retracted from the channel 3206), the light emitting substrate 3231b is controlled to cause the LED to emit light.

The lens portion 3231c is arranged in front of the base portion 3231a, has translucency, and is formed in a lens shape. In the lens part 3231c, the part that overlaps with the LED of the base part 3231a is formed with a recess whose inner diameter widens from the rear to the front, and the other part is formed with a continuous series of recesses of a predetermined shape (for example, a hexagonal pyramid). formed. As a result, the light from the LED arranged behind the lens portion 3231c is efficiently guided to the decorative portion 3231d arranged in front of the lens portion 3231c, and the light reflected by the rear surface of the decorative portion 3231d is diffused. It becomes possible to make the decoration part 3231d reflect.

The decorative portion 3231d is arranged at the forefront, has translucency, and is formed in a predetermined shape (a shape in which a shape suggesting a direction and a pattern shape are combined) on the front surface, and a light diffusion sheet is arranged on the rear surface. ing.

124 and 125 are examples of diagrams showing the appearance of the driving portion of the first decorative portion when viewed from the front. 124 and 125 show a state in which the cover member arranged on the frontmost surface of the drive section 3232 is removed. 124 and 125, only the outer shape of the first decorative portion 3231 is indicated by dotted lines. FIG. 124 shows the driving portion 3232 with the first decorative portion 3231 positioned behind the decorative cover 3230a. FIG. 125 shows the driving section 3232 in a state where the first decorative section 3231 has moved to a position visible to the player.

The drive section 3232 includes a base member 3232 a , a transmission section 3233 , a rotating member 3234 , a drive means 3235 and a guide member 3236 .

The base member 3232a is an example of a base member, is arranged at the rearmost of the drive section 3232, and has a transmission section 3233, a rotating member 3234, a drive means 3235, and a guide member 3236 attached thereto. The base member 3232a is formed with a drive guide 3232b, which is a groove extending in a direction in which the first decorative portion 3231 can move.

The transmission portion 3233 is movably attached to the drive guide 3232b, engages with the rotating member 3234, and is rotatably attached to the base portion 3231a (see FIG. 123) of the first decorative portion 3231. As shown in FIG. The transmission portion 3233 moves along the driving guide 3232b as the rotating member 3234 rotates.

The rotating member 3234 is rotatably attached to the base member 3232a and includes a gear having a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and an arm fixed to the gear and extending in the direction of the drive guide 3232b. is engaged with the transmission portion 3233 at .

The drive unit 3235 has, for example, a motor, is fixed to the base member 3232a, and rotates a gear that meshes with the gear of the rotating member 3234 to rotate the rotating member 3234 . The driving means 3235 is driven under the control of the sub-control board 3092 . The sub-control board 3092, for example, when the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109) opens the ball entrance in the direction indicated by the shape of the first decorative portion 3231 (for example, the shutter of the electric accessory 3210 shown in FIG. 116). 3211 is retracted from the flow path 3206), the driving means 3235 is driven to rotate the rotating member 3234 (in the example shown in FIG. 124, in the direction of moving the transmitting portion 3233 downward).

As shown in FIG. 125, the guide members 3236 extend in a predetermined direction (the direction in which the first decorative portion 3231 is moved, for example, the vertical direction), are overlapped and slidably engaged, and extend in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction. A plurality of slide members 3236a, 3236b, and 3236c having different widths (for example, in the left-right direction) are provided.

The slide member 3236a is fixed to the base member 3232a on the rear surface side, and both side edges extending in a predetermined direction (the direction in which the first decorative portion 3231 is moved, for example, the vertical direction) correspond to both side edges of the slide member 3236b extending in the predetermined direction. and are slidably engaged with each other.

The width of the slide member 3236b in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction is formed narrower than the width of the slide member 3236a in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. One end of the slide member 3236b in the predetermined direction is formed to be engageable with the other end of the slide member 3236a in the predetermined direction. This prevents the slide member 3236b from coming off from the slide member 3236a.

The front side of the slide member 3236c is fixed to substantially the center of the base portion 3231a of the first decorative portion 3231, and both side edges extending in the predetermined direction are slidably engaged with both side edges of the slide member 3236b extending in the predetermined direction. are in agreement. The width of the slide member 3236c in the direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction is formed narrower than the width of the slide member 3236b in the direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction. One end of the slide member 3236c in the predetermined direction is formed to be engageable with the other end of the slide member 3236b in the predetermined direction. This prevents the slide member 3236c from slipping out of the slide member 3236b. Further, the slide member 3236c moves in the predetermined direction with respect to the slide member 3236b, and one end of the slide member 3236c in the predetermined direction is engaged with the other end of the slide member 3236b in the predetermined direction. Then, the slide member 3236b starts moving in the predetermined direction with respect to the slide member 3236a.

With such a configuration, the first decoration device 3230, in the initial state shown in FIG. When opening (for example, when retracting the shutter 3211 of the electric accessory 3210 in FIG. 116 from the flow path 3206), the sub-control board 3092 drives the driving means 3235, and the rotating member 3234 (shown in FIG. 124 In the example, it is rotated in a direction that moves the transmission portion 3233 downward. As a result, the tip of the arm of the rotating member 3234 moves downward, the transmission portion 3233 also moves downward along the drive guide 3232b, and the first decorative portion 3231 to which the transmission portion 3233 is attached also moves downward. Moving.

At this time, in the initial state shown in FIG. 124, the guide member 3236 is fixed to the first decorative portion 3231 as the first decorative portion 3231 moves downward from the state in which the slide members 3236a, 3236b, and 3236c overlap. When the upper end of the slide member 3236c engages the lower end of the slide member 3236b, the slide member 3236b moves downward with respect to the slide member 3236a. As a result, the first decoration device 3230 enters the state shown in FIG. With such a guide member 3236, when moving the first decorative portion 3231 in a predetermined direction, it is possible to prevent blurring in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

(Second decoration device)
Returning to FIG. 114, the second decoration device 3250 is an example of a decoration member, and in the initial state, is arranged behind the decoration cover 3230a and is arranged at a position invisible to the player. The second decoration device 3250 moves from under the decoration cover 3230a to a position where the second decoration portion 3251 is visible to the player.

FIG. 126 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the second decoration device when viewed diagonally from the upper right in the front direction.
The second decoration device 3250 includes a second decoration part 3251 and a driving base part 3255 that supports and moves the second decoration part 3251 .

FIG. 127 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the second decorative portion when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction.
The second decorative portion 3251 includes, from rear to front, a base portion 3251a, a decorative portion 3251b, and a rotating decorative portion 3251c. The second decorative portion 3251 has a different shape before and after the rotation due to the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 3251c. ). In this embodiment, the second decorative portion 3251 has a shape that imitates the eyes of an animal, and has a shape that imitates a state in which the eyes are closed before the rotary decorative portion 3251c is rotated. After the rotation of 3251c, it becomes a shape that imitates a state in which the eyes are open.

The base portion 3251a is arranged at the rearmost side of the second decoration portion 3251, and is engaged with the drive base portion 3255 on the rear side, and has a light emitting board on which LEDs are arranged on the front side. The light-emitting board of the base portion 3251a causes the LED to emit light under the control of the sub-control board 3092 . The base portion 3251a is a pair of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction forming part of the shape of the entire second decorative portion 3251 (for example, in the example shown in FIG. 127, the eyes that are part of the eyes of the animal as a whole). 3251a1 is formed. Also, the base portion 3251a is provided with a decoration drive portion 3251A for rotating the rotary decoration portion 3251c. Details of the decoration driving section 3251A will be described later.

The decorative portion 3251b is fixed to the front side of the base portion 3251a. The portion of the base portion 3251a that overlaps the light emitting substrate is translucent and formed into a lens shape. A transmitting portion 3251b1 formed to have higher permeability than other portions is provided. The decorative portion 3251b includes a first fulcrum 3251b2 that serves as a fulcrum for rotation of a first member 3251c1 of a rotary decorative portion 3251c described later, a second fulcrum 3251b3 that serves as a fulcrum for rotation of a second member 3251c2, Prepare.

The rotating decorative portion 3251c includes a first member 3251c1 and a second member 3251c2. The first member 3251c1 and the second member 3251c2 are formed in a paired shape (in the example shown in FIG. 127, a shape imitating the left and right eyelids of an animal). It is arranged at a position overlapping with the transparent portion 3251b1 of the decorative portion 3251b, and is rotated to move to a position where it does not overlap with the opening 3251a1 of the base portion 3251a and the transparent portion 3251b1 of the decorative portion 3251b.

FIG. 128 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the decoration drive unit when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction. FIG. 129 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the decoration drive unit when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction.

The decoration driving section 3251A includes a first rotating section 3252, a second rotating section 3253, a decoration driving section 3254a, and a decoration detecting section 3254b.

The first rotating part 3252 is rotatably engaged with the first fulcrum 3251b2 (see FIG. 127) of the decoration part 3251b, and is fixed to the first member 3251c1 (see FIG. 127). A projecting body 3252b projecting from the side edge of the first rotating body 3252a on the side of the second rotating part 3253 and a projecting body 3252b projecting from the front surface of the first rotating body 3252a penetrate the decoration part 3251b and engage with the first member 3251c1. and a first engaging portion 3252c.

The second rotating portion 3253 is rotatably engaged with the second fulcrum 3251b3 (see FIG. 127) of the decoration portion 3251b, and is fixed to the second member 3251c2 (see FIG. 127); At a position away from the second fulcrum 3251b3, a projecting body 3253b that projects from the side surface of the second rotating body 3253a on the side of the first rotating part 3252 and engages with the tip side of the projecting body 3252b, and the front surface of the second rotating body 3253a a second engaging portion 3253c that protrudes from and penetrates the decorative portion 3251b to engage with the second member 3251c2.

In this way, the projecting body 3252b projecting from the side edge of the first rotating body 3252a on the second rotating part 3253 side, and the projecting body 3253b projecting from the side surface of the second rotating body 3253a on the first rotating part 3252 side. By engaging the first rotating body 3252a and the second rotating body 3253a, it is possible to interlock and rotate the first rotating body 3252a and the second rotating body 3253a in opposite directions.

The decoration drive unit 3254a has, for example, a motor, and the motor rotates the arm, one end of which is engaged with the first rotating body 3252a, about the first fulcrum 3251b2 (see FIG. 127). The first rotating body 3252a is rotated. The decoration driving section 3254a drives the motor under the control of the sub-control board 3092 under the control of the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109).

The decoration detection unit 3254b is composed of, for example, a proximity sensor, and detects a detection piece protruding from the outer edge of the second rotating body 3253a to detect the rotation state of the second rotating body 3253a (the first member 3251c1 and the second rotating body 3251c1). state of the member 3251c2). The decoration detection unit 3254b transmits a signal indicating that the detection piece has been detected to the sub-control board 3092. FIG. The sub-control board 3092 determines the state of the first member 3251c1 and the second member 3251c2 (initial state or state after the rotary decorative portion 3251c has been rotated) based on the signal transmitted from the decoration detection section 3254b. .

130 and 131 are examples of diagrams showing the appearance of the second decorative portion when viewed from the front. FIG. 130 shows the initial state of the second decorative portion 3251, and FIG. 131 shows the state after the rotary decorative portion 3251c of the second decorative portion 3251 has been rotated.

As shown in FIG. 130, in the initial state, the second decorative portion 3251 is arranged such that the first member 3251c1 and the second member 3251c2 overlap the opening 3251a1 and the transparent portion 3251b1.

128 and 129 controls the sub-control board 3092 to drive the decoration drive section 3254a, thereby rotating the first rotating body 3252a. Accordingly, the projecting body 3252b rotates together with the projecting body 3253b, and the second rotating body 3253a also rotates in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the first rotating body 3252a. By this. The first member 3251c1 fixed to the first rotating body 3252a and the second member 3251c2 fixed to the second rotating body 3253a rotate in mutually opposite directions, and the second decorative portion 3251 moves as shown in FIG. Then, the rotary decorative portion 3251c of the second decorative portion 3251 is in a post-rotation state. In this state, the opening 3251a1 and transparent portion 3251b1 hidden behind the first member 3251c1 and the second member 3251c2 in the initial state shown in FIG. 130 are visible to the player.

For example, in this state, in the display device 7 (see FIG. 108) arranged behind the opening 3251a1 and the transmitting portion 3251b1, the second decorative portion 3251, the opening 3251a1 and the transmitting portion 3251a1 are placed at positions corresponding to the opening 3251a1 and the transmitting portion 3251b1. An image related to the shape of the portion 3251b1 (for example, if the opening 3251a1 and the transmissive portion 3251b1 have a shape that imitates the outline of the eye, the image of the pupil, etc.) is generated based on the control of the sub-control board 3092 (see FIG. 109). may be displayed.

FIG. 132 is an example of a diagram showing the appearance of the drive base when viewed from the front. In FIG. 132 and FIG. 134 described later, only the outer shape of the second decorative portion 3251 is indicated by dotted lines.

The driving base portion 3255 includes a base member 3255 a , a pair of transmission portions 3256 facing each other, a pair of rotating members 3257 facing each other, a pair of driving portions 3258 facing each other, and a guide member 3259 .

The base member 3255a is an example of a base member, is arranged at the rearmost of the drive base portion 3255, and has a transmission portion 3256, a rotating member 3257, a drive portion 3258, and a guide member 3259 attached thereto. The base member 3255a is formed with a drive guide 3255b, which is a groove extending along the track of the tip portion of the driving portion 3258 when the drive portion 3258 rotates, which is the direction in which the second decorative portion 3251 can move.

The transmission portion 3256 is movably engaged with the distal end side of a rotating member 3257, which will be described later, and is rotatably attached to the base portion 3251a (see FIG. 127) of the second decorative portion 3251. As shown in FIG. The transmission portion 3256 moves in the moving direction of the second decorative portion 3251 as the rotating member 3257 rotates.

The rotating member 3257 is attached to the base member 3255a so as to be rotatable around a fulcrum 3257a, extends from the fulcrum 3257a toward the driving portion 3258, and is engaged with the transmission portion 3256 on the distal end side so as to be movable from the distal end to the fulcrum 3257a side. are in agreement. Further, the rotating member 3257 is formed with a groove 3257b extending radially around the fulcrum 3257a. The groove 3257b intersects with the driving guide 3255b of the base member 3255a and the trajectory near the tip of the driving portion 3258 during rotation. A connecting portion 3257c rotatably attached to the tip of the driving portion 3258 and slidably attached to the driving guide 3255b is slidably attached to the groove 3257b.

The driving portion 3258 is rotatably attached to the base member 3255a about a fulcrum 3258a, extends from the fulcrum 3258a toward the rotating member 3257, and has a connecting portion 3257c rotatably attached to the distal end thereof. The driving portion 3258 rotates by driving a motor controlled by the sub-control board 3092 .

FIG. 133 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the guide member when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction.
In the guide member 3259, a first slide portion 3259a extending in a predetermined direction (the direction in which the second decorative portion 3251 is moved, eg, vertical direction) and a second slide portion 3259c are connected by a connecting portion 3259b.

The first slide portion 3259a has a plurality of slide members 3259a1, 3259a2, and 3259a3 that are stacked and slidably engaged with each other and have different widths in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction).

The connecting portion 3259b extends in a predetermined direction (the direction in which the second decorative portion 3251 is moved, for example, the vertical direction). 2 slide part 3259c is fixed.

The second slide portion 3259c has a plurality of slide members 3259c1, 3259c2, and 3259c3 that are stacked and slidably engaged with each other and have different widths in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction (for example, left-right direction).

The slide member 3259a1 is fixed to the base member 3255a on the rear surface side, and both side edges extending in a predetermined direction (the direction in which the second decorative portion 3251 is moved, for example, the vertical direction) correspond to both side edges of the slide member 3259a2 extending in the predetermined direction. and are slidably engaged with each other.

The width of the slide member 3259a2 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction is formed narrower than the width of the slide member 3259a1 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. One end of the slide member 3259a2 in the predetermined direction is formed to be engageable with the other end of the slide member 3259a1 in the predetermined direction. This prevents the slide member 3259a2 from coming off from the slide member 3259a1.

The front side of the slide member 3259a3 is fixed to one side of the connecting portion 3259b in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, and both side edges extending in the predetermined direction are slidably aligned with both side edges of the slide member 3259a2 extending in the predetermined direction. are engaged in The width of the slide member 3259a3 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction is formed narrower than the width of the slide member 3259a2 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. One end of the slide member 3259a3 in the predetermined direction is formed to be engageable with the other end of the slide member 3259a2 in the predetermined direction. This prevents the slide member 3259a3 from coming off from the slide member 3259a2.

The rear side of the slide member 3259c1 is fixed to the other side of the connecting portion 3259b in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, and both side edges extending in a predetermined direction (the direction in which the second decorative portion 3251 is moved, for example, the vertical direction) are slidable. Both side edges of the member 3259c2 extending in the predetermined direction are slidably engaged with each other.

The width of the slide member 3259c2 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction is formed wider than the width of the slide member 3259c1 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. One end of the slide member 3259c2 in the predetermined direction is formed to be engageable with the other end of the slide member 3259c1 in the predetermined direction. This prevents the slide member 3259c2 from coming off from the slide member 3259c1.

The front side of the slide member 3259c3 is fixed to substantially the center of the base portion 3251a of the second decorative portion 3251, and both side edges extending in the predetermined direction are slidably engaged with both side edges of the slide member 3259c2 extending in the predetermined direction. are in agreement. The width of the slide member 3259c3 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction is formed wider than the width of the slide member 3259c2 in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. One end of the slide member 3259c3 in the predetermined direction is formed to be engageable with the other end of the slide member 3259c2 in the predetermined direction. This prevents the slide member 3259c3 from coming off from the slide member 3259c2.

As a result, when the second decorative portion 3251 moves in a predetermined direction, the slide member 3259c3 moves in the predetermined direction with respect to the slide member 3259c2, and one end of the slide member 3259c3 in the predetermined direction moves toward the slide member 3259c2. , the slide member 3259c2 starts moving in the predetermined direction with respect to the slide member 3259c1.

Then, when one end of the slide member 3259c2 in the predetermined direction is engaged with the other end of the slide member 3259c1 in the predetermined direction, the slide member 3259a3 connected to the slide member 3259c1 is moved by the connecting portion 3259b. , the slide member 3259a2 starts to move in the predetermined direction, and when one end of the slide member 3259a3 in the predetermined direction is engaged with the other end of the slide member 3259a2 in the predetermined direction, the slide member 3259a2 starts moving in the predetermined direction with respect to the slide member 3259a1.

In this way, by arranging the first slide portion 3259a and the second slide portion 3259c side by side in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction in which the second decorative portion 3251 moves, the first slide portion 3259a and the second slide portion 3259c are arranged in parallel by the connecting portion 3259b. While suppressing the shortest length of the second slide portion 3259c, it is possible to extend the longest length compared to the case where only one of the slide portions is provided.

FIG. 134 is an example of a diagram showing the appearance of the driving base when viewed from the front. 134 shows that the second decorative portion 3251 is placed behind the decorative cover 3230a (see FIG. 114) from the initial state shown in FIG. It shows the state when it moves to a position where it can be visually recognized by a person.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 132, the sub-control board 3092 drives the motor of the drive unit 3258, and the drive base unit 3255 rotates (in the example shown in FIG. 134, in the direction of moving the connecting unit 3257c downward). be done. As a result, the tip of the rotating member 3257 moves downward, the transmitting portion 3256 also moves downward, and the second decorative portion 3251 to which the transmitting portion 3256 is attached also moves downward.

At this time, in the initial state shown in FIG. 132, the guide member 3259 is such that the slide members 3259a1, 3259a2, and 3259a3 of the first slide portion 3259a shown in FIG. As the second decorative portion 3251 moves downward from the overlapping state, the slide member 3259c3 fixed to the second decorative portion 3251 also moves downward, and the upper end side end of the slide member 3259c3 moves downward. When the slide member 3259c2 is locked to the lower end of the slide member 3259c2, the slide member 3259c2 moves downward with respect to the slide member 3259c1, and when the upper end of the slide member 3259c2 is locked to the lower end of the slide member 3259c1, When the slide member 3259a3 connected to the slide member 3259c1 by the connecting portion 3259b moves downward with respect to the slide member 3259a2, and the upper end of the slide member 3259a3 engages the lower end of the slide member 3259a2. , the slide member 3259a2 starts to move downward with respect to the slide member 3259a1. As a result, the second decorative portion 3251 is brought into the state shown in FIG. With such a guide member 3259, when moving the second decorative portion 3251 in a predetermined direction, it is possible to prevent blurring in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

(Third decoration device)
Returning to FIG. 114, the third decoration device 3260 is an example of a decoration member, and is provided as a left and right pair, each of which rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.
FIG. 135 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the third decoration device when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the rearward direction. In FIG. 135 and FIG. 136 described later, the worm gear 3263c has a simplified shape, and the helical gear shape is shown as a columnar shape.

The third decoration device 3260 includes a third decoration section 3261 and a decoration drive section 3262 .
The third decorative portion 3261 includes a base portion 3261a and a decorative portion 3261b.

The base portion 3261a supports the decorative portion 3261b on the front side so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the decorative driving portion 3262 for rotating the decorative portion 3261b is attached on the rear side.

The decorative portion 3261b is formed in a shape (for example, a spiral shape) that gives an impression of being drawn into the center of rotation by rotating when viewed from the front. Also, the decoration part 3261b is formed in a shape similar to that of another decoration device (for example, a fourth decoration device 3270 to be described later).

The decoration driving part 3262 includes an integral part 3263 and a transmission part 3264 .
FIG. 136 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the integrated component when viewed obliquely from the upper left in the rearward direction.

The integral part 3263 comprises a base member 3263a, a drive means 3263b, a worm gear 3263c and a wheel gear 3263d, and these parts are integrated.

The base member 3263a is composed of a plate-like body, and includes a driving means holding portion 3263a1 to which the driving means 3263b is fixed, a worm gear holding portion 3263a2 that rotatably holds the worm gear 3263c, and a wheel that rotatably holds the wheel gear 3263d. and a gear holding portion 3263a3.

The worm gear holding portion 3263a2 continues to the driving means holding portion 3263a1 and has a hole through which the shaft of the worm gear 3263c extending to the driving means 3263b is inserted.

The wheel gear holding portion 3263a3 is connected to the worm gear holding portion 3263a2, and the wheel gear 3263d is rotated so that the axis perpendicular to the axis passing through the center of the hole through which the worm gear 3263c is inserted (the axis of the worm gear 3263c) becomes the center of rotation. The shaft is rotatably held. That is, the worm gear holding portion 3263a2 and the wheel gear holding portion 3263a3 form a substantially L shape when viewed from the side, and the worm gear 3263c and the worm gear 3263c and It holds the wheel gear 3263d.

The driving means 3263b is composed of, for example, a motor, and the motor rotates the worm gear 3263c. The driving means 3263b drives the motor under the control of the sub-control board 3092 under the control of the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109).

The worm gear 3263c has a rotating shaft connected to the drive means 3263b at its base end, and the leading end of the rotating shaft passes through the hole of the worm gear holding portion 3263a2 and extends in a direction parallel to the wheel gear holding portion 3263a3. The provided gear portion is arranged at a position facing the wheel gear holding portion 3263a3.

In the wheel gear 3263d, the base end of the rotating shaft is rotatably supported by the wheel gear holding portion 3263a3, and the tip side of the rotating shaft extends in a direction parallel to the worm gear holding portion 3263a2. portion meshes with the gear portion of worm gear 3263c. Further, the wheel gear 3263d may be a stack of gears having different gear ratios. Then, one of the plurality of gears may be meshed with the gear portion of the worm gear 3263c, and the other gear may be meshed with another member (transmission portion 3264 in the example shown in FIG. 135). This makes it possible to adjust the number of rotations of the worm gear 3263c rotated by the driving means 3263b and the number of rotations of the rotating member (decorative portion 3261b in the example shown in FIG. 135).

Here, when the worm gear and the wheel gear are meshed to transmit the rotational force, if the worm gear and the wheel gear are displaced or play is provided, the rotational force is not transmitted.
According to the third decoration device 3260, the worm gear 3263c and the wheel gear 3263d are integrated by the integrated part 3263, so that the meshing between the worm gear 3263c and the wheel gear 3263d can be maintained even when exposed to vibrations or the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the rotational force is not transmitted.

Returning to FIG. 135, the transmission portion 3264 is rotatably provided on the base portion 3261a and includes a first wheel gear 3264a and a second wheel gear 3264b. The first wheel gear 3264a meshes with the wheel gear 3263d. The second wheel gear 3264b is connected to the decorative portion 3261b and meshes with the first wheel gear 3264a. Alternatively, the first wheel gear 3264a may be omitted and the second wheel gear 3264b may be directly meshed with the wheel gear 3263d.

With this configuration, the driving means 3263b of the third decoration device 3260 is driven under the control of the sub-control board 3092 to rotate the worm gear 3263c. , the decorative portion 3261b rotates.

(Fourth decoration device)
Returning to FIG. 114, a fourth decoration device 3270 that is an example of the second decoration member is attached to the front side of the base portion 3204 .
FIG. 137 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the fourth decoration device when viewed obliquely from the upper right in the front direction.

The base portion 3204 has an opening 3204a formed in its central portion, through which an image displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 108) arranged behind the base portion 3204 can be visually recognized by the player. and

The fourth decoration device 3270 includes a guide portion 3270a, a first movable member 3271, a second movable member 3272, a first movable member driving portion 3273, a second movable member driving portion 3274, and a detection member 3275. Prepare.

The guide portion 3270a is provided around the opening 3204a on the front side of the base portion 3204, and holds the outer circumferences of the first movable member 3271 and the second movable member 3272 rotatably.

The first movable member 3271 is formed in a ring shape, and its outer circumference is rotatably held by the guide portion 3270a. 3271e.

The frame 3271a is formed in a ring shape having an opening 3271b penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is rotatably held by the guide portion 3270a.

The annular gear 3271c is formed in an annular shape, has a gear formed on its outer circumference and is arranged along the frame 3271a. The annular gear 3271c meshes with the gear of the first movable member driving section 3273. As shown in FIG. The first movable member 3271 rotates when the annular gear 3271c receives a rotating force from the first movable member drive section 3273 .

The movable decorative member 3271d is attached to the inner peripheral side of the frame 3271a so as to be rotatable toward the center of the frame 3271a, and a decorative member having a predetermined shape is arranged on the front side. The base end of the movable decorative member 3271d is rotatably attached to the frame 3271a. Rotate toward. In addition, the plurality of movable decorative members 3271d are arranged along the inner circumference of the frame 3271a, and as a whole have a shape related to other effect members (second movable member 3272, third decorative portion 3261, etc.). decoration (for example, spiral shape) is formed.

The holding member 3271e is arranged on the front side of the frame 3271a, is fixed to the guide portion 3270a, and is arranged so as to partially overlap the frame 3271a from the front side, and is a member that holds down the frame 3271a to the front side. be.

The second movable member 3272 is formed in a ring shape and is arranged so as to overlap with the first movable member 3271. The outer circumference of the second movable member 3272 is rotatably held by the guide portion 3270a on the front side of the first movable member 3271. 3272a, an opening 3272b, an annular gear 3272c, a decorative member 3272d, and a pressing member 3272e.

The frame 3272a is formed in a ring shape having an opening 3272b penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is rotatably held by the guide portion 3270a.

The annular gear 3272c is formed in an annular shape and has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer circumference, and is arranged along the frame 3272a. The annular gear 3272c meshes with the gear of the second movable member driving section 3274. As shown in FIG. The second movable member 3272 rotates when the annular gear 3272c receives a rotating force from the second movable member drive section 3274 .

The decorative member 3272d has a predetermined shape and is arranged on the front surface of the frame 3272a. The decorative member 3272d has a decoration (for example, a spiral shape) related to other effect members (the first movable member 3271, the third decorative portion 3261, etc.).

The holding member 3272e is arranged on the front side of the frame 3272a, is fixed to the guide portion 3270a, and is arranged so as to partially overlap the frame 3272a from the front side, and is a member that holds down the frame 3272a to the front side. be.

The first movable member driving section 3273 is based on the control of the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109). and a meshing gear to rotate the first movable member 3271 .

The second movable member driving section 3274 is based on the control of the main control board 3091 (see FIG. 109), the motor driven by the control of the sub control board 3092, and the annular gear 3272c of the second movable member 3272 rotated by the motor. and meshing gears to rotate the second movable member 3272 .

The detection member 3275 moves according to the undulations of the outer shape of the frame 3272a of the second movable member 3272, and detects the movable position of the frame 3272a.
FIG. 138 is an example of a diagram showing the appearance of the detection member when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 138, the outer edge of the frame 3272a of the second movable member 3272 has a normal portion 3272a1 that forms a normal arc and a concave portion that is shorter than the normal portion 3272a1 to the center of rotation of the frame 3272a. A portion 3272a2, an inclined portion 3272a3 that gently connects from the normal portion 3272a1 to the concave portion 3272a2, and a steep portion 3272a4 that steeply connects from the concave portion 3272a2 to the normal portion 3272a1 and forms a plane orthogonal to the normal direction of the normal portion 3272a1. , are formed.

The detection member 3275 includes a base 3275a, a moving portion 3275b, a biasing portion 3275c, and a detection portion 3275d.

The base 3275a is attached to the guide portion 3270a near the outer edge of the frame 3272a of the second movable member 3272 .

The moving part 3275b is formed in a shaft shape, the long side is arranged along the center direction of rotation of the frame 3272a, and is attached to the base 3275a so as to be movable along the center direction. The moving portion 3275b is biased by a biasing portion 3275c (for example, a spring member) in a direction in which the tip contacts the outer edge of the frame 3272a. Further, the moving portion 3275b has a detection piece 3275b1 extending in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction.

The detection unit 3275d is composed of, for example, a proximity sensor, and detects the detection piece 3275b1 of the moving unit 3275b. When detecting the detection piece 3275b1, the detection unit 3275d transmits a detection signal to the sub-control board 3092 (see FIG. 109). The sub-control board 3092 can determine the rotational position of the frame 3272a of the second movable member 3272 by receiving the detection signal.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 138, when the tip of the moving portion 3275b of the detecting member 3275 is in contact with the concave portion 3272a2 of the frame 3272a of the second movable member 3272, the detecting portion 3275d detects Piece 3275b1 is detected. Then, when the frame 3272a rotates (counterclockwise rotation in the example shown in FIG. 138) and the portion with which the tip of the moving portion 3275b abuts shifts from the recessed portion 3272a2 to the normal portion 3272a1, the moving portion 3275b changes to the biasing portion 3275c. against the bias of the frame 3272a, it moves away from the center of rotation of the frame 3272a. Then, the detection piece 3275b1 is separated from the detection section 3275d and is no longer detected by the detection section 3275d.

In addition, by forming an inclined portion 3272a3 on the side opposite to the rotational direction of the concave portion 3272a2 between the concave portion 3272a2 and the normal portion 3272a1 on the outer edge of the frame 3272a, the moving portion 3275b is gradually rotated. It can be moved away from the center. In addition, by forming a steep portion 3272a4 on the rotational direction side of the recessed portion 3272a2 between the recessed portion 3272a2 and the normal portion 3272a1 on the outer edge of the frame 3272a, the moving portion 3275b is attached to the biasing portion 3275c. Since the force can quickly move toward the center of rotation, it is possible to quickly detect the detection piece 3275b1 in the detection section 3275d.

According to the gaming machine described above, the following operational effects are achieved.
A plurality of fixing parts 3310 for fixing the game unit 3200 to the back box 3300 are arranged on the rear surface 3301 of the back box 3300 on the outer edge side. The game unit 3200 can be fixed by one of the plurality of fixing parts 3310 .
As a result, even if the position to be fixed to the back box 3300 changes according to the type, shape, etc. of the game unit 3200, it can be fixed by any one of the plurality of fixing portions 3310. FIG.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the versatility of the back box.

When fixing the game unit 3200 to the back box, the engaging portion 3240 of the game unit 3200 is engaged with the fixing portion 3310 of the back box 3300 . At this time, the contact portion 3243 of the engaging portion 3240 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the fixing portion 3310 , and the projecting portion 3244 of the engaging portion 3240 is inserted into the insertion portion of the fixing portion 3310 . A portion of the fixing member 3320 is passed through the penetrating portion of the fixing portion 3310 and engaged with the engaging portion 3245 of the engaging portion 3240 . Thereby, the game unit 3200 is fixed to the back box 3300 .

In this way, the part that joins the game unit 3200 to the back box 3300 is joined face-to-face, the protruding part 3244 is inserted into the insertion part 3311, and the fixing member 3320 can be fixed. The positioning of the game unit 3200 is facilitated, and the strength of the joining portion can be improved.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the versatility of the back box, the workability in assembling the game machine, and the strength of the joining portion.

Also, in the second decoration device 3250 , the second decoration portion 3251 attached to the base member 3255 a can be moved by the guide member 3259 . The guide member 3259 includes a slide portion extending in a predetermined direction and having a plurality of slide members that are overlapped and slidably engaged with each other and have different widths in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. Accordingly, the second decorative portion 3251 can be moved by moving the plurality of sliding members relative to each other. With such a sliding portion, it is not necessary to arrange a rail or the like in advance to the destination of the second decorative portion 3251, so the degree of freedom in design is improved. Further, by configuring the slide portion with a plurality of slide members having mutually different widths in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, for example, it is possible to arrange a narrow slide member inside a wide slide member, It becomes possible to suppress the thickness of the entire slide portion.

Moreover, a plurality of slide portions can be connected by the connecting portion 3259b. As a result, the moving distance of the second decorative portion 3251 can be the sum of the slidable distances of the plurality of sliding portions. Here, if the number of slide members is simply increased without providing a connecting portion in order to extend the movement distance of the second decorative portion 3251, the width of the slide members will be gradually narrowed, resulting in a decrease in strength. There is a risk.
According to this configuration, by connecting a plurality of slide portions with the connecting portion 3259b, it is possible to extend the moving distance of the moving member while suppressing a decrease in strength.

Also, the first movable member 3271 and the second movable member 3272 that are arranged in an overlapping manner can be moved in the same direction or in the opposite direction. Since the detecting member 3275 is movable according to the undulations of the outer shape of the second movable member 3272, the moving portion 3275b of the detecting member 3275 moves according to the undulations, and based on the movement of the moving portion 3275b, A movable position of the second movable member 3272 can be detected.

Also, the direction of the winning unit 3205 can be suggested by the shape of the first decoration device 3230 moved to a position visible to the player. Furthermore, by emitting light from the LED of the light emitting substrate 3231b provided in the first decoration device 3230, it is possible to notify that the winning unit 3205 is in the open state.

Here, the first game ball that flows down the first passage 3221 contacts the wall member 3223 and does not flow down as it is, for example, the second game ball that has flowed down next is the first game ball When the first game ball is pushed down by the wall member and the second game ball, ball jam occurs.
According to this embodiment, a second passageway 3222 adjacent to the first passageway 3221 is provided, and above the wall member 3223 disposed between the first passageway 3221 and the second passageway 3222, a ball having a diameter larger than that of the game ball is provided. Since the passable space 3224 is formed, when the above ball clogging occurs, the third game ball contacts the second game ball, the second game ball climbs over the wall member 3223, It is possible to flow down to the second passage 3222 and eliminate ball clogging.

In addition, the first unit 3201 is provided with a first gripping portion 3200a and a second gripping portion 3200b having different shapes, and the rear box 3300 for fixing the first unit 3201 is provided with a first gripping portion 3200a and a second gripping portion 3200b having different shapes. By providing the first gripping portion connection portion 3300a and the second gripping portion connection portion 3300b to which are respectively connected, the orientation of the first unit 3201 with respect to the back box 3300 becomes clear, for example, when assembling the back box Since it becomes easy to set the first unit 3201 in an appropriate direction with respect to 3300, work efficiency is improved. In addition, by making the first gripping portion 3200a a through hole and making the second gripping portion 3200b a hole that does not penetrate, it is possible for a person who transports the game machine to hold it in an appropriate way (a finger is passed through the first gripping portion 3200a to hold it). , a way of holding the second grip portion 3200b with a finger, etc.).

Further, when the first rotating portion 3252 rotates, the first member 3251c1 rotates, and the force is transmitted from the projecting body 3252b through the projecting body 3253b of the second rotating body 3253a, and the second rotating body 3253a rotates, and the second member 3251c2 rotates. This makes it possible to link and rotate the two members without using gears.
Here, the two members can be linked and rotated by meshing the gears respectively provided on the two members. However, if, for example, these two members are movable as a whole, the gears may become disengaged, causing malfunction.
According to this configuration, it is possible to link and rotate the two members without using a gear. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

Further, when the solenoid 3214 is driven, a force is applied to the other end of the shaft member 3215, the shaft member 3215 rotates about a predetermined position, and the shutter 3211 engaged with the one end of the shaft member 3215 moves. It is possible to protrude into the channel 3206 or retract from the channel 3206 . In this manner, the shutter drive unit 3213 applies a force to the other end of the shaft member 3215 that rotates about a predetermined position, and the shutter 3211 is moved by the one end. It is possible to convert the force into force in the direction of moving the shutter 3211 . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the solenoid 3214 on the rear side of the shutter 3211 in the movement direction, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in layout inside the gaming machine.

Further, the shaft member 3215 is arranged below the shutter 3211 and above the solenoid 3214 . That is, the shaft member 3215 can convert the force from the solenoid 3214 arranged on the lower side into a force for moving the shutter 3211 arranged on the upper side. Therefore, the shutter 3211 and the solenoid 3214 for moving the shutter 3211 can be stacked vertically, and the degree of freedom in layout inside the gaming machine can be further improved.

As long as there is no contradiction, each configuration and each means of the gaming machine can be applied to each other and can be combined. Further, in each configuration of the above-described first to third pachinko game machines and the above-described game devices, each other pachinko game machine may be incorporated or changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention, and may be used as desired. Combinations in configuration are possible.

In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment. In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine was described as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various techniques of the present invention described above can also be applied to other game machines, for example, pinball game machines and enclosed game machines. In addition to the gaming machines mentioned above, general-purpose technology can also be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines, slot machines, and pachislot machines.

<Appendix>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, on a game board, a predetermined variable display start condition, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll. is established, control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the image display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination. When (a specific display mode) is reached, there is provided a system in which the game is shifted to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.

In this type of game machine, internal members such as a game board, a performance device, and decorative members are arranged inside the game machine. These internal members are accommodated in a back member such as a back box provided on the back side of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2019-017680, a back cover is provided to cover various parts and devices provided on the back side of the game board, and a game machine in which the game board and various production devices are attached to this back cover. is proposed.

By the way, game machines have different internal members depending on the model. Therefore, the backing member should be adapted to the inner member. However, in a game machine installed in a game arcade, the back member is arranged at a position that cannot be visually recognized by the player. For this reason, there is little need for the back member to have a shape corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the versatility of the backing member.

In order to achieve the above objects, the present invention provides the following game machines.

(1) an internal member (for example, game unit 3200, etc.) arranged inside;
a back member (eg, back box 3300, etc.) that has a rear surface (eg, rear surface 3301, etc.) disposed behind the internal member and covers at least the rear side of the internal member,
A plurality of fixing portions (for example, fixing portions 3310, etc.) for fixing the inner member to the back member can be arranged on the rear surface.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of fixing portions for fixing the internal member to the back member are arranged behind the back member.
Accordingly, even if the position to be fixed to the back member changes according to the type, shape, etc. of the internal member, it can be fixed by any one of the plurality of fixing portions.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the versatility of the backing member.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member has an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 3240 or the like) that engages with the fixing portion,
The engaging portion is
A contact portion (for example, a contact portion 3243 or the like) that contacts the rear surface;
A protruding portion (for example, a protruding portion 3244 or the like) that protrudes toward the rear surface side from the contact portion;
The abutting portion has a locking portion (eg, locking portion 3245, etc.) that can be locked by a fixing member (eg, locking member 3320, etc.),
The fixed part is
an insertion portion (for example, an insertion portion 3311 or the like) into which the protrusion can be inserted;
A part of the fixing member has a penetrating portion (for example, penetrating portion 3312, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when fixing the internal member to the back member, the engaging portion of the internal member is engaged with the fixing portion of the back member. At this time, the contact portion of the engaging portion is brought into contact with the rear surface of the fixing portion, and the projecting portion of the engaging portion is inserted into the insertion portion of the fixing portion. A portion of the fixing member is passed through the through portion of the fixing portion and engaged with the engaging portion of the engaging portion. This secures the inner member to the backing member.
In this way, the part where the inner member is joined to the back member is joined by the surface, the protruding portion is inserted into the insertion portion, and the fixing member can be fixed, thereby facilitating the positioning of the inner member with respect to the back member. It becomes possible to improve the strength of the jointed portion.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the versatility of the backing member, the workability in assembling the game machine, and the strength of the joining portion.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member includes a decorative member (e.g., second decorative device 3250, etc.),
The decorative members include a base member (eg, base member 3255a, etc.), a moving member (eg, second decorative portion 3251, etc.) that moves in a predetermined direction, and a guide member that is movably supported by the base member to the moving member. (For example, a guide member 3259, etc.),
The guide member includes a plurality of slide members (for example, slide members 3259a1, 3259a2, 3259a3, and 3259c1) that extend in the predetermined direction, are overlapped and slidably engaged, and have different widths in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. , 3259c2, 3259c3, etc.) (eg, first slide portion 3259a, second slide portion 3259c, etc.).

According to such a configuration, in the decorative member, the movable member attached to the base member can be moved by the guide member. The guide member includes a slide portion extending in a predetermined direction and having a plurality of slide members that are overlapped and slidably engaged with each other and have different widths in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. Accordingly, the moving member can be moved by moving the plurality of slide members relative to each other. With such a slide portion, there is no need to arrange rails or the like in advance to the destination of the moving member, so the degree of freedom in design is improved. Further, by configuring the slide portion with a plurality of slide members having mutually different widths in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, for example, it is possible to arrange a narrow slide member inside a wide slide member, It becomes possible to suppress the thickness of the entire slide portion.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The guide member further comprises a connecting portion (for example, a connecting portion 3259b, etc.) that connects the plurality of slide portions,
The connecting part is
connected to the slide member (for example, slide member 3259a3, etc.) arranged on the frontmost side of one of the slide portions,
It is characterized in that it is connected to the slide member (for example, slide member 3259c1, etc.) arranged on the rearmost surface side of the other slide portion.

According to such a configuration, the plurality of slide portions can be connected by the connecting portion. Thereby, the moving distance of the moving member can be the sum of the slidable distances of the plurality of sliding portions. Here, if the number of slide members is simply increased without providing a connecting portion in order to extend the moving distance of the moving member, the width of the slide member may be gradually narrowed, resulting in a reduction in strength. .
According to this configuration, by connecting the plurality of slide portions with the connecting portion, it is possible to extend the movement distance of the moving member while suppressing a decrease in strength.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member includes a second decorative member (e.g., fourth decorative device 3270, etc.),
The second decorative member is
a plurality of movable members (e.g., first movable member 3271, second movable member 3272, etc.) that are arranged in an overlapping manner and are movable along the same direction;
A detection member (for example, detection member 3275 etc.) that can move according to the undulations of the outer shape of the movable member,
The movable position of the movable member can be detected based on the movement of the detection member.

According to such a configuration, the plurality of movable members arranged in an overlapping manner can be moved in the same direction or in the opposite direction. Since the detection member is movable according to the undulations of the outer shape of the movable member, the detection member moves according to the undulations, and the movable position of the movable member can be detected based on the movement of the detection member. .

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member includes a third decoration member (for example, the first decoration device 3230, etc.) that can move from a position invisible to the player to a position visible to the player,
A ball opening that opens and closes (for example, winning unit 3205 etc.),
Control means (for example, main control board 3091 etc.) for controlling the opening and closing of the ball entrance;
A light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a light-emitting substrate 3231b, etc.);
Effect control means (for example, sub control board 3092 etc.) that controls the light emission of the light emitting means and the movement of the third decorative member,
The third decorative member is
formed in a shape that suggests the direction of the entrance,
The light emitting means is provided,
When the ball entrance is opened by the control means, the effect control means moves the third decorative member to a position visible to the player and controls the light emitting means to emit light. characterized by performing

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the direction of the ball entrance by the shape of the third decorative member that has moved to a position visible to the player. Furthermore, by emitting light from the light-emitting means provided on the third decorative member, it is possible to notify that the entrance is in an open state.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member includes a ball passage through which a game ball passes (for example, a ball passage 3220, etc.),
The ball passage is
a first passage (e.g., first passage 3221, etc.);
a second passage (e.g., second passage 3222, etc.) adjacent to the first passage;
A wall member (for example, a wall member 3223, etc.) arranged between the first passage and the second passage with which the game ball flowing down the first passage abuts,
A space larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, passable space 3224, etc.) is formed above the wall member.

The first game ball flowing down the first passage contacts the wall member and does not flow down as it is. When the first game ball is held down by the wall member and the second game ball, ball jam occurs.
According to this configuration, the second passage adjacent to the first passage is provided, and a space larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed above the wall member disposed between the first passage and the second passage. When a ball jam as described above occurs, the third game ball comes into contact with the second game ball, the second game ball climbs over the wall member, flows down into the second passage, and the ball jam occurs. It is possible to cancel.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member has, at the top,
a first gripping portion (for example, a first gripping portion 3200a, etc.) having a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction;
A second gripping portion (e.g., second gripping portion 3200b, etc.) having a hole that extends from the front surface to the rear surface and does not penetrate is formed at a position spaced apart from the first gripping portion,
The backing member has, at the top,
a first gripping portion connecting portion (for example, a first gripping portion connecting portion 3300a, etc.) in which a hole is formed that overlaps with the first gripping portion and penetrates in the front-rear direction;
and a second gripping portion connecting portion (for example, a second gripping portion connecting portion 3300b, etc.) that overlaps with the second gripping portion.

According to such a configuration, the internal member is arranged at a position spaced apart from the first gripping portion having a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the top, and the first gripping portion, extending from the front surface to the rear surface direction, and a second gripping portion formed with a non-penetrating hole. In addition, the back member to which the internal member is fixed includes a first gripping portion connecting portion overlapping the first gripping portion and formed with a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a second gripping portion connecting portion overlapping the second gripping portion. , provided.

In this way, by providing two gripping portions with different shapes in the internal member, and providing a connection portion to which the gripping portions with different shapes are connected to the back member for fixing the internal member, the orientation of the internal member with respect to the back member is achieved. becomes clear, for example, when assembling the game machine, it becomes easy to set the inner member in an appropriate direction with respect to the back member, thereby improving work efficiency. In addition, by making one grip part a through hole and the other grip part a hole that does not penetrate, it is possible for a person who transports the game machine to hold it in an appropriate way (a finger is passed through one grip part, and the other grip part is held). It is possible to guide the gripping portion to a holding method such as putting a finger on the gripping portion.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member includes a third decorative member (e.g., second decorative device 3250, etc.),
The third decorative member is
a first rotating portion (e.g., first rotating portion 3252, etc.) that rotates a first member (e.g., first member 3251c1, etc.) about a first fulcrum (e.g., first fulcrum 3251b2, etc.);
a second rotating portion (eg, second rotating portion 3253, etc.) that rotates a second member (eg, second member 3251c2, etc.) about a second fulcrum (eg, second fulcrum 3251b3, etc.); prepared,
The first rotating portion is
a first rotating body (e.g., first rotating body 3252a, etc.) that rotates around the first fulcrum;
a projecting body (for example, a projecting body 3252b or the like) projecting from the side edge of the first rotating body,
The second rotating part is
a second rotating body (for example, a second rotating body 3253a, etc.) that rotates about the second fulcrum;
a projecting body (for example, a projecting body 3253b, etc.) that protrudes from the side surface of the second rotating body and engages with the distal end side of the projecting body at a position away from the second fulcrum;
A force is transmitted from the projecting body to the projecting body as the first rotating part rotates, and the second rotating part also rotates.

According to such a configuration, when the first rotating portion rotates, the first member rotates, and the force is transmitted from the projecting body through the projecting body of the second rotating body, causing the second rotating part to rotate. The moving body rotates and the second member rotates. This makes it possible to link and rotate the two members without using gears.
Here, the two members can be linked and rotated by meshing the gears respectively provided on the two members. However, if, for example, these two members are movable as a whole, the gears may become disengaged, causing malfunction.
According to this configuration, it is possible to link and rotate the two members without using a gear. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The internal member includes a shielding part (e.g., electric accessory 3210, etc.) that shields or opens the flow path of the game ball (e.g., flow path 3206, etc.),
The shielding part is
a shielding member (for example, a shutter 3211 or the like) that protrudes into the flow path and retreats from the flow path;
a driving unit (for example, shutter driving unit 3213 etc.) that drives the shielding member,
The drive unit
a shaft member (for example, a shaft member 3215 or the like) that engages with the shielding member and is rotatable about a predetermined position;
a driving means (for example, a solenoid 3214 or the like) that rotates the shaft member by driving,
One end of the shaft member is engaged with the shielding member, and the other end across the predetermined position is engaged with the driving means.

According to such a configuration, when the driving means is driven, a force is applied to the other end of the shaft member, the shaft member rotates around a predetermined position, and the shielding member engaged with the one end of the shaft member moves. Then, it becomes possible to protrude into the channel or to retreat from the channel. In this way, by applying force to the other end of the shaft member that rotates around a predetermined position by the drive unit and moving the shielding member on the one end side, the force in a direction different from the direction in which the shielding member is moved is applied to the shaft member. It is possible to convert the force in the direction of moving the shielding member. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the driving means on the rear side of the shielding member in the moving direction, and the flexibility of the layout inside the game machine can be improved.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The shaft member is arranged below the shielding member and above the driving means.

According to such a configuration, the shaft member is arranged below the shielding member and above the driving means. That is, the shaft member can convert the force from the driving means arranged on the lower side into a force for moving the shielding member arranged on the upper side. Therefore, the shielding member and the driving means for moving the shielding member can be stacked vertically, and the degree of freedom in the layout inside the game machine can be further improved.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the versatility of the back member.

201, 1201, 2201 Main CPU
301, 1301, 2301 Sub CPU
120, 1120, 2120 First starting port 140, 1140A, 1140B, 2140 Second starting port 3200 Game unit 3240 Engagement portion 3241 Main shaft portion 3242 Shaft portion 3243 Contact portion 3243a Contact surface 3244 Projection portion 3245 Locking portion 3300 Back Box 3300a First gripping portion connection portion 3300b Second gripping portion connection portion 3301 Rear surface 3310 Fixing portion 3311 Insertion portion 3312 Through portion 3320 Fixing member

Claims (1)

a game area in which game balls roll;
A first start prize winning port and a second start winning port provided on the game area, in which a game ball can win a prize, and when the game ball wins, a game ball or game ball number data related to the game ball is provided to the player. a starting prize opening,
It is provided on the game area and transitions between an open state in which it is easy for a game ball to win and a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win. A variable winning port that provides game ball number data,
A small winning game in which the variable winning opening is opened based on the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening and a larger amount of game balls or games than the small winning game Lottery means for determining whether or not to execute a winning game including a big winning game to which game ball number data related to the ball can be given;
Determining means for determining whether to execute a winning game including the big winning game or the small winning game based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The determination means determines whether or not to execute a winning game including the big winning game, and determines whether or not to execute the small winning game when it is determined not to execute the winning game including the big winning game. is performed, and when it is determined that the small winning game is not executed, it is determined that the game is lost.

Images